OMRON Varispeed L7 frequency inverter User´s Manual
Below you will find brief information for Varispeed L7 CIMR-L7Z23P77, Varispeed L7 CIMR-L7Z25P57, Varispeed L7 CIMR-L7Z27P57, Varispeed L7 CIMR-L7Z43P77, Varispeed L7 CIMR-L7Z45P57. This manual details installation, wiring, operation, and troubleshooting for these lift frequency inverters. It covers various models across 200V and 400V voltage classes, offering detailed parameter settings and protective functions.
Advertisement
Advertisement
TOMCC71067600AA-OY.qxd 01.10.2003 10:32 Seite 1
Manual No.
TOMCC71067600AA-OY
VARISPEED L7
The frequency inverter for the lifts
USER´S MANUAL
OMRON YASKAWA MOTION CONTROL B.V. – Wegalaan 65 – 2132 JD Hoofddorp – The Netherlands phone: + 31 (0) 23 568 74 00 – fax: + 31 (0) 23 568 74 88 – www.omronyaskawa.com
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Manual No. TOMCC71067600AA-OY
1
2
Contents
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use ................................................ VIII
Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...............................................................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ..............................................1-8
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover.............................................1-10
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front Cover ...........1-11
Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
I
II
3
4
Installing and Wiring Option Cards............................................................. 2-24
Digital Monitor/ Operator and Modes.....................................3-1
User Parameters ......................................................................4-1
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels........................................... 4-3
5
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) ...................................4-51
Parameter Settings by Function............................................ 5-1
Carrier Frequency Derating and
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics...........................................5-17
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation ......................................................5-23
Improving the Operation Performance .......................................................5-26
Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function) ........................5-26
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) (Closed Loop Vector only) ....................................5-29
Stabilizing Speed (Automatic Frequency Regulator) (Open Loop Vector) ...................5-31
III
IV
6
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function).................. 5-43
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions ............................................................ 5-57
Troubleshooting ......................................................................6-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions............................................................ 6-2
7
8
9
If Peripheral Devices are Influenced by the Starting or Running Inverter.....................6-18
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running ........................6-18
Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 7-1
Specifications ......................................................................... 8-1
Appendix ................................................................................. 9-1
V
VI
Warnings
CAUTION
Cables must not be connected or disconnected, nor signal tests carried out, while the power is switched on.
The Varispeed L7 DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off. To avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out maintenance. Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the inverter. It contains semiconductors, which are not designed for such high voltages.
Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on. The printed circuit board must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power.
Never connect general LC/RC interference suppression filters, capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the inverter input or output.
To avoid unnecessary overcurrent faults, etc, being displayed, the signaling contacts of any contactor or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic (eg baseblock).
This is absolutely imperative!
This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter. All safety precautions and instructions for use must be followed.
The inverter must be operated with the appropriate line filters, following the installation instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered.
Only then will adequate protection be provided. Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
VII
VIII
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use
1. General
Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this inverter. Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed.
Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation. Removal of housing components, the digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installation or operation. The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give rise to other dangers.
The instructions in this manual must be followed. Installation, operation and maintenance may only be carried out by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety precautions, qualified personnel are defined as individuals who are familiar with the installation, starting, operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and have the proper qualifications for this work. Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used properly for their intended purpose.
The DC bus capacitors can remain live for about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power.
It is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers. All of the main circuit terminals may still carry dangerous voltages.
Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters.
Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with any form of access to the inverters.
2. Intended Use
Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
Their installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive:
EN 50178, 1997-10, Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices
EN 60204-1, 1997-12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)/
Please note: Includes Corrigendum of September 1998
EN 61010-1, A2, 1995 Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950, 1991 + A1, 1992 + A2, 1993 + A3, 1995 + A4, 1996, modified)
CE marking is carried out to EN 50178, using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions.
3. Transportation and storage
The instructions for transportation, storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the technical data.
4. Installation
Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation. The cooling air must flow in the specified direction. The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position (e.g. upright). Maintain the specified clearances. Protect the inverters against impermissible loads. Components must not be bent nor insulation clearances changed. To avoid damage being caused by static electricity, do not touch any electronic components or contacts.
5. Electrical Connection
Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regulations. Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations. In particular, follow the installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), e.g. shielding, grounding, filter arrangement and laying of cables. This also applies to equipment with the CE mark. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits.
Your supplier or OYMC representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency inverters.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.
6. Notes
The Varispeed L7 frequency inverters are certified to CE, UL, and c-UL.
IX
X
EMC Compatibility
1. Introduction
This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using OYMC frequency inverters to design and install electrical switch gear. It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive. The manual's installation and wiring instructions must therefore be followed.
Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below.
Product standard: EN 61800-3:1996
EN 61800-3; A11:2000
2. Measures to Ensure Conformity of OYMC Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive
OYMC frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible types of installation. This manual therefore has to be limited to general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The cables pass this on to the environment like an aerial.
Connecting an item of electrical equipment (e.g. drive) to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF or LF interference to get into the mains.
The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding and shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable.
Moreover, cable shields must be connected with purpose-made ground clips.
3. Laying Cables
Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:
Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible.
Use a power cable with well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length.
Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal (e.g.
metal plate).
Shielded Cable:
– Use a cable with braided shield.
– Ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see following figure).
Ground clip Ground plate
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any coats of varnish and paint.
– Ground the cable shields at both ends.
– Ground the motor of the machine.
XI
XII
Line Filters
Recommended Line Filters for Varispeed L7
Inverter Model
Varispeed L7
CIMR-L7Z43P77
CIMR-L7Z44P07
CIMR-L7Z45P57
CIMR-L7Z47P57
CIMR-L7Z40117
CIMR-L7Z40157
CIMR-L7Z40187
CIMR-L7Z40227
CIMR-L7Z40307
CIMR-L7Z40377
CIMR-L7Z40457
CIMR-L7Z40557
Model
3G3RV-PFI3018-SE
3G3RV-PFI3035-SE
3G3RV-PFI3060-SE
3G3RV-PFI3070-SE
3G3RV-PFI3130-SE
Line Filter
Current
(A)
Weight
(kg)
18
35
60
70
130
1.3
2.1
4.0
3.4
4.7
Dimensions
W x D x H
141 x 46 x 330
206 x 50 x 355
236 x 65 x 408
80 x 185 x 329
90 x 180 x 366
Maximum Voltage
Ambient Temperature
: AC 480V 3phase
: 45°C (max.)
* Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment (EN61800-3, A11)
(general availability, 1st environment)
Inverter Model
Varispeed L7
CIMR-L7Z23P77
CIMR-L7Z25P57
CIMR-L7Z27P57
CIMR-L7Z20117
CIMR-L7Z20157
CIMR-L7Z20187
CIMR-L7Z20227
CIMR-L7Z20307
CIMR-L7Z20377
CIMR-L7Z20457
CIMR-L7Z20557
Model
3G3RV-PFI2035-SE
3G3RV-PFI2060-SE
3G3RV-PFI2100-SE
3G3RV-PFI2130-SE
3G3RV-PFI2160-SE
3G3RV-PFI2200-SE
Maximum Voltage
Ambient Temperature
: AC 240V 3phase
: 45°C (max.)
* max. motor cable length: 10 m Class B, 50 m Class A
Rated Voltage: AC240V 3 ph.
Ambient Temperature: 45°C (max.)
Line Filter
Current
(A)
35
60
Weight
(kg)
1.4
3.0
100
130
160
200
4.9
4.3
6.0
11.0
Dimensions
W x D x H
141 x 46 x 330
206 x 60 x 355
236 x 80 x 408
90 x 180 x 366
120 x 170 x 451
130 x 240 x 610
Installation inverters and EMC filters
PE
L3
L1 L2
Ground Bonds
( remove any paint )
PE
Line
Filter
Load
Inverter
L2
PE L1
L3 U
V
WPE
Cable Length as short as possible
Metal Plate
Ground Bonds
( remove any paint )
M
3~
Motor cable screened
XIII
XIV
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
•
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
•
•
InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
Profibus is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed L7 Introduction ......................................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery..................................................1-3
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ........................................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .......................1-8
Installation Orientation and Space .........................................1-9
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ......................1-10
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front
Cover ....................................................................................1-11
1
1
-2
Varispeed L7 Introduction
Varispeed L7 Models
The Varispeed L7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage class es: 200 V and 400 V. The maximum motor capacities vary from 3.7 to 55 kW (23 models).
Voltage
Class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity kW
200 V class
400 V class
22
30
37
45
55
3.7
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
15
18.5
22
30
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
37
45
55
* 200V/400V class 30KW-55KW model is developing.
40
54
67
76
93
7
Output
Capacity kVA
7
10
14
20
27
33
28
34
40
54
9
12
15
22
67
80
106
CIMR-L7Z23P7
CIMR-L7Z25P5
CIMR-L7Z27P5
CIMR-L7Z2011
CIMR-L7Z2015
CIMR-L7Z2018
CIMR-L7Z2022
CIMR-L7Z2030
CIMR-L7Z2037
CIMR-L7Z2045
CIMR-L7Z2055
CIMR-L7Z43P7
CIMR-L7Z44P0
CIMR-L7Z45P5
CIMR-L7Z47P5
CIMR-L7Z4011
CIMR-L7Z4015
CIMR-L7Z4018
CIMR-L7Z4022
CIMR-L7Z4030
CIMR-L7Z4037
CIMR-L7Z4045
CIMR-L7Z4055
Varispeed L7
Table 1.1 Varispeed L7 Models
Basic Model
Number
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-L7Z
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(NEMA 1)
CIMR-L7Z
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20)
CIMR-L7Z
Remove the top and bottom covers from the
Enclosed Wall-mounted model.
23P71
25P51
27P51
20111
20151
20181
23P77
25P57
27P57
20117
20157
20187
20220
20300
20370
20450
20550
Remove the top and bottom covers from the
Enclosed Wall-mount model.
40220
40300
40370
40450
40550
20221
20301
20371
20451
20551
43P71
44P01
45P51
47P51
40111
40151
40181
40221
40301
40371
40451
40551
20227
20307
20377
20457
20557
43P77
43P77
45P57
47P57
40117
40157
40187
40227
40307
40377
40457
40557
Confirmations upon Delivery
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Item
Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered?
Table 1.2 Checks
Method
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your OYMC representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic European Inverter: 3-phase, 400 VAC,
3.7 kW, IEC IP20 standards
Inverter model
Input specification
Output specification
Lot number
Serial number
UL file number
MODEL
INPUT
CIMR-L7Z43P7
SPEC: 43P77A
AC3PH 380-480V 50/60Hz 10.2A
OUTPUT
O/N
S/N
AC3PH 0-480V 0-120Hz 8.5A 3min. 50%ED 8.5kVA
MASS: 4.0 kg
PRG:
FILE NO E131457
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORARION
MADE IN JAPAN
Ms
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
Inverter specifications
Mass
1
1-
3
1
-4
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – L7 Z 2 3P7
Inverter
Varispeed L7
No.
Z
Specification
OYMC Europ. Std.
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC Input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
3P7
5P5 to
55
Max. Motor Capacity
3.7 kW
5.5 kW to
55 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point.
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity, the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC Input, 3-phase 400 V
2 3P7 1
No.
3P7
5P5 to
55
Max. Motor Capacity
3.7 kW
5.5 kW to
55 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point
No.
0
1
7
Protective Structure
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted
(NEMA Type 1)
Enclosed wall-mounted
(IEC IP20)
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
Confirmations upon Delivery
Component Names
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in
minal cover removed is shown in
.
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting
Diecast cover
Nameplate
1
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
1-
5
1
-6
Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in
. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in
Inveter cover
Front cover
Mounting holes
Cooling fan
Nameplate
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)
Ground terminals
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1xIEC IP20)
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1 y
IEC IP20) are shown below.
1
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW
Grommet
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
1-
7
1
-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Table 1.3 Installation Site
Type
Enclosed wall-mounted
(NEMA1)
Ambient Operating Temperature
-10 to + 40
°C
Humidity
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis and IEC IP20 -10 to + 45
°C
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
•
•
Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45
°C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
Installation Orientation and Space
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
B
A
Air
30 mm min.
50 mm min.
30 mm min.
Horizontal Space
200V class inverter, 3.7 to 55 kW
400V class inverter, 3.7 to 55 kW
120 mm min.
Vertical Space
Air
A B
50 mm 120 mm
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
1
1-
9
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
1
Fig 1.1 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)
Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
-10
1
2
Fig 1.2 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z4022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front Cover
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and front cover in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator/Monitor from the front cover before removing the front cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are described below.
Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator/Monitor in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital
Operator/Monitor and lift the Digital Operator/Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator/Monitor as shown in the following illustration.
1
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)
1-
11
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
-12
1
1
2
Fig 1.12 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator/Monitor attached to the front cover; otherwise,
Digital Operator/Monitor may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator/Monitor
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator/Monitor onto the Inverter using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator/Monitor at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator/Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
A
B
Fig 1.13 Mounting the Digital Operator/Monitor
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor and Front Cover
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator/Monitor or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator/Monitor attached to the front cover.
Imperfect contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator/Monitor to the front cover.
Inverters of 22 kW or More
For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator/Monitor
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
1
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z4022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator/Monitor is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator/Monitor is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator/Monitor
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
1-
13
1
-14
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connection Diagram ....................................................2-2
Terminal Block Configuration.......................................2-4
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals......................................2-5
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................2-17
Wiring Check .............................................................2-23
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-24
2
2
-2
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in
.
When using the Digital Operator/Monitor, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
L1
3-phase power
380 to 480V
50/60Hz
L2
L3
PE
Magnetic
Contactor
DC reactor to improve input power factor (optional)
Braking Resistor unit (optional)
Short-circuit Bar
Line
Filter
(+1)
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
(+2) ( ) B1 B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Motor
IM/PM
Multi-function
Inputs
(Factory setting)
Forward run/stop
Reverse run/stop
Nominal speed
Inspection Run
Internediate speed
Leveling speed
Not used
Hardware baseblock
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
BB
+24 V 8 mA
SC
IP24V (24V)
CN5 (NPN setting)
E (G)
TA1
PG-X2
(Optional)
TA3
TA2
P
P
PG
A Pulse
B Pulse
Z Pulse
Pulse Monitor Output
RS-422 Level
(100m or less wiring)
External frequency reference
Frequency setting adjustment
Frequency setter
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
3
2
0 to 10 V
1
P
Communication and
Control Cards
(For Option)
+V
Frequency setting power +15V 20mA
A1
AC
Master speed reference 0 to 10V
0V
2CN
MA
MB
MC
Fault contact Output
250VAC 1A or less
30VDC 1A or less
M1
M2
Brake Command
(Factory setting)
M3
M4
M5
M6
Contactor Control
(Factory setting)
Multi-fanction
Contact Output
250VAC 1A or less
30VDC 1A or less
Inverter Ready
(Factory setting)
Input Voltage
48/96VDC
For Battery
DC/DC
Converter
For option
P
Note:
1.Main circuit terminals are indicatied with double circles and
control circuit terminals are indicatied with a single circles
2.The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20mA
3.Sequence input signal S1 to S7 and BB are labelled for sequence
connections for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors as the
default setting.
P0
N0
Output Voltage
For Contorl power supply
Shielded wires
Twisted-pair wires
Fig 2.4 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)
Connection Diagram
Circuit Descriptions
Refer to the numbers indicated in
1
These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation
2
These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV (or equivalent) or non-
SELV circuits, but not both.
3
Inverters supplied by a four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)
These circuits are SELV circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV (or equivalent) circuits.
Inverters supplied by a three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)
These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits other circuits by protective separation, but only with basic insulation. These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible, unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation
2
IMPORTANT
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
E(G)
SC SC SC BB +V A1 AC
S1 S2 S3
S4
S5 S6 S7
M5 M6 MA MB MC
M3 M4 M1 M2
E(G)
2. The output current capability of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
3. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.
4. The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 and BB is shown for the connection of contacts or NPN transistors (0V common and sinking mode). This is the default setting.
For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply, refer to
.
5. A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Remove the short circuit bar when connecting a DC reactor.
2-
3
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangements are shown in
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.5 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 3.7 kW)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminals
Fig 2.6 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more)
2
2-
4
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from
TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
L7Z23P7
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M4 1.2 to 1.5
4
(12 to 10)
4
(12)
L7Z25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M4 1.2 to 1.5
6
(10)
6
(10)
L7Z27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO
M5 2.5
10
(8 to 6)
10
(8)
L7Z2011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO M5 2.5
L7Z2015
L7Z2018
W/T3, NO
B1, B2, PO
W/T3, NO
B1, B2, PO
L7Z2022
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
V/T2,
M6
M5
M6
V/T2,
M8
M5
M6
M8
M6
M8
L7Z2030
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
L7Z2037
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO r/l1,
∆/l2
M10
M8
M10
M4
M8
M6
M8
4.0 to 5.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
16
(6 to 4)
25
(4 to 2)
10
(8 to 6)
25
(4)
25 to 35
(3 to 2)
10 to 16
(8 to 6)
25
(4)
25 to 35
(3 to 1)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
50
(1 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
70 to 95
(2/0 to 4/0)
6 to 16
(10 to 4)
35 to 70
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
16
(6)
-
25
(4)
50
(1)
-
25
(4)
25
(3)
-
25
(4)
70
(2/0)
–
35
(2)
1.5
(16)
25
(4)
-
25
(4)
25
(3)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
2
2-
5
2
-6
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
L7Z2045
L7Z2055
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO r/l1,
∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, NO
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3, PO
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M10
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
95
(3/0 to 4/0)
6 to 16
(10 to 4)
50 to 70
(1 to 2/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
50 to 95
(1/0 to 4/0)
90
(4/0)
6 to 70
(10 to 2/0)
35 to 95
(3 to 4/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
2 mm
(AWG)
95
(3/0)
Wire Type
–
50
(1)
1.5
(16)
50
× 2P
(1/0
× 2P)
90
(4/0)
–
50
(1/0)
1.5
(16)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables r/l1,
∆/l2
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75
°C
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
L7Z43P7
L7Z44P0
L7Z45P5
L7Z47P5
L7Z4011
L7Z4015
L7Z4018
L7Z4022
M4
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, NO
B1, B2, PO
M5
M5
(M6)
M6
M5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO, PO
Terminal
Screws
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
M6
M6
M8
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
4.0 to 5.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
10
(8 to 6)
6 to 10
(10 to 6)
10 to 35
(8 to 2)
10
(8)
10 to 25
(8 to 4)
16
(6 to 4)
16 to 35
(6 to 2)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
2.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
2.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
4
(12 to 10)
2.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
4
(10)
4
(12 to 10)
6 to 10
(10 to 6)
2.5
(14)
4
(12)
2.5
(14)
4
(10)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
4
(12)
2.5
(14)
4
(12)
4
(12)
10
(8)
6
(10)
10
(8)
6
(10)
10
(8)
10
(8)
10
(8)
16
(6)
16
(6)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
L7Z4030
L7Z4037
L7Z4045
L7Z4055
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
Terminal
Screws
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO, PO
V/T2,
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
25
(4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
25 to 50
(4 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
35 to 50
(2 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
50
(1 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
25
(4)
25
(4)
35
(2)
-
25
(4)
35
(2)
-
25
(4)
50
(1)
-
25
(4)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75
°C.
Table 2.3 Lug Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm
2
)
Terminal Screws
M3.5
0.5
Size
1.25 / 3.5
M4 1.25 / 4
0.75
1.25
M3.5
M4
M3.5
M4
1.25 / 3.5
1.25 / 4
1.25 / 3.5
1.25 / 4
2
3.5/5.5
M8
M4
M5
M6
M3.5
M4
M5
M6
2 / 3.5
2 / 4
2 / 5
2 / 6
2 / 8
5.5 / 4
5.5 / 5
5.5 / 6
8
14
22
M6
M8
M6
M8
M8
M5
M6
M8
5.5 / 8
8 / 5
8 / 6
8 / 8
14 / 6
14 / 8
22 / 6
22 / 8
2
2-
7
2
-8
Wire Thickness (mm
30/38
50/60
80
100
100
150
200
325
2
)
Terminal Screws
M8
M8
M10
M10
M12
M12 x 2
M16
Size
38 / 8
60 / 8
60 / 10
80 / 10
100 / 10
100 / 12
150 / 12
200 / 12
325 / 12
325 / 16
IMPORTANT
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (
Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10
-3
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in
. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose Terminal Symbol
Model: CIMR-L7Z
200 V Class 400 V Class
23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055
Main circuit power input
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2022 to 2055 4022 to 4055
Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055
23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055 DC bus terminals
1,
Braking Resistor Unit connection
B1, B2
DC reactor connection
1, 2
Braking Unit connection
3,
23P7 to 2018
23P7 to 2018
2022 to 2055
43P7 to 4018
43P7 to 4018
4022 to 4055
Ground
Battery power input
PO, NO
23P7 to 2055
23P7 to 2055
43P7 to 4055
43P7 to 4055
2
2-
9
2
-10
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in
B2
B1
+ 1
+ 2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class
CIMR - L7Z23P7 to 2018
400 V Class
CIMR - L7Z43P7 to 4018
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
B2
B1
+
1
+
2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
Power
Supply
Control
Circuit
Power
Supply
Control
Circuit
N0 P0
N0 P0
CIMR - L7Z2022,2030
+ 3
CIMR - L7Z4022 to 4055
+ 3
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
-
N0
Power
Supply
P0
Control
Circuit
N0
Power
Supply
P0
Control
Circuit
CIMR - L7Z2037 to 2055
+ 3
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
r/l1
∆ 200/ l200
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
N0
Power
Supply
P0
Control
Circuit
Note: Consult your OYMC representative before using 12-phase rectification.
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in
. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-L7Z3P7 to 2018 and 43P7 to 4018
DC reactor
(optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
CIMR-L7Z2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
2
The DC reactor is built in.
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor.
CIMR-L7Z2037 to 2055
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase
200 VAC
Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models.
Fig 2.7 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
2-
11
2
-12
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing Fuses
To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.
Inverter Type
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
Table 2.6 Input Fuses
Voltage (V)
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
Fuse
Current (A)
100
130
150
180
30
40
60
80
240
300
350
I
2 t (A
2 s)
82~220
220~610
290~1300
450~5000
1200~7200
1800~7200
870~16200
1500~23000
2100~19000
2700~55000
4000~55000
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
50
60
70
80
15
20
25
30
100
125
150
150
34~72
50~570
100~570
100~640
150~1300
400~1800
700~4100
240~5800
500~5800
750~5800
920~13000
1500~13000
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Installing a Moulded-case Circuit Breaker
When connecting the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) to the power supply using a moulded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.
•
•
Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times of the inverter's rated current.
For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. If an earth leakage breaker should be used, select one that detects only the leakage current which is in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans but not high-frequency leakage currents.
•
•
For a special-purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
When using a general earth leakage breaker, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
Installing a Magnetic Contactor at the Input
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off by a control circuit, a magnetic contactor can be used.
The following things should be considered:
•
•
The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Do not exceed one power up per hour.
When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator/Monitor, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the output phase sequence.
Installing an Input AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or a phase advancing capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the inverter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
2
2-
13
2
-14
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respective to the motor lead wires U, V, and W.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter case, an electric shock or grounding may occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the
Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn.
Using a Magnetic Contactor
Check the control sequence to make sure, that the magnetic contactor (MC) between the Inverter and motor is not turned ON or OFF during inverter operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the inverter’s overcurrent protection may operate.
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
The cable between the Inverter and motor is 30 m max.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
•
Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100
Ω and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10
Ω.
•
•
•
Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK NO
Fig 2.8 Ground Wiring
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Connecting a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Connect a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit to the Inverter like shown in the
The example shows a braking resistor with integrated thermal overload switch. To prevent the braking unit/ braking resistor from overheating, design the control circuit to turn OFF the power supply using the thermal
overload relay contacts of the units as shown in
.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 3.7 to 18.5 kW Output Capacity
Braking Resistor
Inverter
Thermal overload relay contact
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output Capacity
CDBR Braking Unit Braking Resistor
Inverter
Thermal overload relay contact
2
Thermal overload relay contact
Fig 2.9 Connecting the Braking Resistor and Braking Unit
2-
15
2
-16
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and jumper settings like shown in
for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e. from the second Unit onwards).
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Braking
Resistor
Thermal overload relay contact
Braking
Resistor
Braking
Resistor
Inverter
Braking Unit #2
Braking Unit #3
Braking Unit #1
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Fig 2.10 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Connecting the battery power supply
Varispeed L7 is equipped with the cable for the battery power supply connection by the standard.
Please detach the twisted-pair cable connected with main circuit terminal B1/+3 and -.
Please connect the twisted-pair cable by using the relay terminal for UPS/Battery.
Connecting the battery power supply as shown in
Table 2.7
L2-11 (Battery Voltage)
H1-05 (Terminal S7 function selection)
To use the battery voltage is input
Setting “85” Battery operation command
UPS/Battery terminal
P0
N0
Inverter
Fig 2.11 Connecting the battery power supply
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 30 m or less, and separate the lines from main power lines or other control circuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency source (and not from a Digital Operator/Monitor), used shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground.
The terminal numbers and the appropriate wire sizes are shown in
Terminals
AC, SC, A1, +V, S1, S2,
S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, BB,
MA, MB, MC, M1, M2,
M3, M4, M5, M6
Table 2.8 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
Wire Type
Phoenix type
0.5 to 0.6
Single wire
*3:
0.5 to 2.5
Stranded wire:
0.5 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
0.75
(18)
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
E (G) M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2.5
*2
(20 to 14)
1.0
(12)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to
for suitable lug sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
0.25 (24)
0.5 (20)
0.75 (18)
1.5 (16)
2 (14)
Table 2.9 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Model
AI 0.25 - 8YE
AI 0.5 - 8WH
AI 0.75 - 8GY
AI 1.5 - 8BK
AI 2.5 - 8BU d1
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.8
2.3
d2
2
2.5
2.8
3.4
4.2
L
12.5
14
14
14
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
2
Fig 2.12 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
2-
17
2
-18
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Screwdriver
Control circuit terminal block
Blade of screwdriver
Strip the end for
7 mm if no solderless terminal is used.
Wires
Solderless terminal or wire without soldering
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.13 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in
. Use the appropriate terminals for the correct purposes.
Type
Digital input signals
Analog input signals
Table 2.10 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings
No.
Signal Name Function
S1 Forward run/stop command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2 Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3 Nominal speed
S4
S5
Inspection run
Intermediate speed
Nominal speed when ON.
Inspection RUN when
ON.
Intermediate speed when
ON.
Leveling speed when ON.
Functions are selected by setting H1-01 to
H1-05.
S6 Leveling speed
S7 Not used
BB Hardware baseblock
SC Digital input common
–
–
–
+V 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references
Signal Level
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photo-coupler
–
–
15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
0 to +10 V(20 k
Ω)
–
A1 Frequency reference
AC Analog reference neutral
E(G)
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point
0 to +10 V/100%
M1
M2
Brake command
(1NO contact)
–
–
Brake command when
ON.
–
Digital output signals
M3
M4
M5
M6
MA
MB
MC
Contactor Control
(1NO contact)
Inverter Ready
(1NO contact)
Fault output signal (SPDT)
(1 Change over contact)
Contactor Control when
ON
Inverter Ready when ON.
Multi-function contact outputs
Relay contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
*3
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
* 1. Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment.
Flywheel diode
External power:
30 VDC max.
Coil
1 A max.
The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.
Fig 2.14 Flywheel Diode Connection
2
2-
19
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Sinking/Sourcing Mode (NPN/PNP Selection)
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common, NPN) and sourcing mode
(+24V common, PNP) by using the jumper CN5. An external power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.11 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode (NPN) External Power Supply – Sinking Mode (NPN)
S1
S2
B1
SC
A1
B2 B3
A2 A3
CN5
IP24V
(+24V)
S1
S2
+
24 VDC
SC
A1
B1 B2 B3
A2 A3
CN5
IP24V
(+24V)
2
Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode (PNP)
S1
S2
B1
SC
A1
B2 B3
A2 A3
CN5
IP24V
(+24V)
External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode (PNP)
S1
S2
-
24 VDC
SC
A1
B1 B2 B3
A2 A3
CN5
IP24V
(+24V)
2-
20
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in
Multi-function
Inputs
(Factory setting)
Forward run/stop
Reverse run/stop
Nominal speed
Inspection Run
Internediate speed
Leveling speed
Not used
Hardware baseblock
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
BB
+24 V 8 mA
SC
IP24V (24V)
CN5 (NPN setting)
E (G)
External frequency reference
Frequency setting adjustment
Frequency setter
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
3
2
0 to 10 V
1
P
Communication and
Control Cards
(For Option)
+V
A1
AC
Frequency setting power +15V 20mA
2CN
Master speed reference 0 to 10V
0V
Input Voltage
48/96VDC
For Battery
DC/DC
Converter
For option
P
Note:
1.Main circuit terminals are indicatied with double circles and
control circuit terminals are indicatied with a single circles
2.The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20mA
3.Sequence input signal S1 to S7 and BB are labelled for sequence
connections for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors as the
default setting.
P0
N0
Output Voltage
For Contorl power supply
Shielded wires
Twisted-pair wires
MA
MB
MC
Fault contact Output
250VAC 1A or less
30VDC 1A or less
M1
M2
Brake Command
(Factory setting)
M3
M4
Contactor Control
(Factory setting)
Multi-fanction
Contact Output
250VAC 1A or less
30VDC 1A or less
M5
M6
Inverter Ready
(Factory setting)
Fig 2.15 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2
2-
21
2
-22
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
•
•
Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3, PO, NO) and other high-power lines.
Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, and M6 (contact outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
•
•
•
•
If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults.
Ground the cable shields with the maximum contact area of the shield and ground.
Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends.
Wiring Check
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform continuity check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.
•
•
Is all wiring correct?
Have no wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
•
•
Are all screws tight?
Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2
2-
23
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models and Specifications
Up to three Option Cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one card into each of the three
places on the controller card (A, C and D) shown in
.
lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Table 2.12 Option Card Specifications
Card Model Specifications
Mounting
Location
PG Speed Control Cards
PG-B2
PG-X2
Two phase (phase A and B), +12V inputs, max. response frequency: 50 kHz
Three phase (phase A, B, Z), line driver inputs
(RS422), max. response frequency: 300 kHz
A
A
DeviceNet communications card
Profibus-DP communications card
InterBus-S communications card
CANOpen communications card
SI-N1
SI-P1
SI-R1
SI-S1
Option card for DeviceNet fieldbus
Option card for Profibus-DP fieldbus
Option card for InterBus-S fieldbus
Option card for CANOpen fieldbus
C
C
C
C
Analog Output Cards
Digital Output Cards
AO-08
2 channel analog output card
Signal level: 0 to 10 V
Resolution: 8 Bit
AO-12
2 channel high resolution analog output card
Signal level: -10 to +10 V
Resolution: 11 Bit + sign
DO-08
6 channel digital output card for monitoring the inverter status (fault, zero speed, running, etc.)
DO-02C 2 channel relay contact output
D
D
D
D
2
Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter does not glow anymore. After that remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and front cover and then mount the Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for the mounting instructions for option slots A and C.
2-
24
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Preventing C and D Option Card Connectors from Rising
After installing an Option Card into slot C or D, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out.
A Option Card mounting spacer hole
CN4
A Option Card connector
CN2
C Option Card connector
A Option Card mounting spacer
(Provided with A Option Card)
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D Option Card)
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
D Option Card
D Option Card mounting spacer
A Option Card mounting spacer
A Option Card
Fig 2.16 Mounting Option Cards
2
2-
25
2
-26
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.
Terminal
TA1
TA2
TA3
3
4
(E)
6
1
2
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Table 2.13 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Pulse input terminals phase A
Pulse input terminals phase B
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
H: +8 to 12 V (max. input frequency: 50 kHz)
GND pulse input phase A
H: +8 to 12 V (max. input frequency: 50 kHz)
GND pulse input phase B
Pulse monitor output terminals phase A
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
Pulse monitor output terminals phase B
Shield connection terminal
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
-
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
Terminal
TA1
TA2
TA3
6
7
8
9
10
No.
1
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
(E)
Table 2.14 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Contents Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
Power supply for pulse generator
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
Pulse input terminal phase A (+)
Pulse input terminal phase A (–)
Pulse input terminal phase B (+)
Pulse input terminal phase B (–)
Pulse input terminal phase Z (+)
Pulse input terminal phase Z (–)
Common terminal inputs
Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (+)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (–)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (+)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (–)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (+)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (–)
Common terminal monitor outputs
Shield connection terminal
Line driver input (RS422 level)
(maximum input frequency: 300 kHz)
–
Line driver output (RS422 level output)
–
–
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Wiring
Wiring the PG-B2
The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG-B2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG.
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Pulse input phase A
GND pulse input phase A
Pulse input phase B
GND pulse input phase B
Pulse monitor output phase A
Pulse monitor output phase B
Fig 2.17 PG-B2 Wiring Using the Option Cards Power Supply
2
Fig 2.18 PG-B2 Wiring Using a 12 V External Power Supply
•
Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
•
Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
•
The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
•
The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05. The factory preset if for forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
2-
27
2
-28
PG power supply +12 V
Pulse monitor output phase A
Pulse input phase A
A-phase pulses
Pulse monitor output phase B
Pulse input phase B
B-phase pulses
•
When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
•
The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using parameter F1-06.
Fig 2.19 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
Wiring the PG-X2
The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG-X2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG.
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
PG-X2
+12 V
0 V
+5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
Pulse input phase A (–)
Pulse input phase B (+)
Pulse input phase B (–)
Pulse monitor output phase A
Pulse monitor output phase B
Pulse monitor output phase Z
Fig 2.20 PG-X2 Wiring Using the Option Cards Power Supply
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Fig 2.21 PG-X2 Wiring Using a 5 V External Power Supply
•
Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
•
Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
•
The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
•
The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
2
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Use not more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines and keep them separate from power lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in
Table 2.15 Wire Sizes
Terminal
Terminal
Screws
Wire Thickness (mm
2
)
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
-
M3.5
0.5 to 1.0
0.5 to 2.5
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
Straight Solderless Terminals
We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
2-
29
2
-30
Cable Lug Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The lug sizes and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in
Table 2.16 Cable Lugs and Tightening Torques
Wire Thickness [mm
2
]
Terminal
Screws
Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N
• m)
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
M3.5
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
2 - 3.5
0.8
Precautions
The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to
the following precautions when wiring.
•
Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main power lines and other control circuits.
•
•
The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused by noise.
Connect the shield (green grounding cable of the option card) to the shield terminal (E).
•
•
•
Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply consumption is higher than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
Make sure not to exceed the PG cards maximum input frequency. The output frequency of the pulse generator can be calculated using the following formula.
f
PG (Hz) =
Motor speed at maximum output frequency (min
–1
)
60 x PG rating (p/rev)
Digital Monitor/
Operator and Modes
The Varispeed L7 is equipped with the Digital Monitor JVOP-163 which shows the drive status.
The optional Digital Operator JVOP-160 can be used to adjust parameters as required.
A This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes.
LED Monitor JVOP-163 ................................................3-2
Digital Operator JVOP-160 ...........................................3-3
3
LED Monitor JVOP-163
LED Monitor
Indicators the operation status by the combination of the LED display (Lights up, Blink, and Off) at RUN,
DS1, and DS2.
The LED pattern is as follows at each mode.
Operation Mode Indicators
RUN: Lights up during inverter run, Off if the inverter is stopped
DS1: Drive Status 1
DS2: Drive Status 2
The combination of the three LEDs Run, DS1 and DS2 indicates the drive status.
Drive Status Indications
Alarm Indications
Fault Indications
3
-2
LED Display Examples
Normal operation: The figure below shows the LED display when the drive is ready and no FWD/REV signal is active
RUN DS1 DS2 POWER
Alarm:
Fault:
The figure below shows an example of the LED display when a minor fault occurs.
Refer to Chapter 6 and take appropriate countermeasures.
RUN DS1 DS2 POWER
The figure below shows an example of the LED display when an OV or UV fault has occurred
RUN DS1 DS2 POWER
Digital Operator JVOP-160
Digital Operator JVOP-160
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Status Indicators
FWD: Lights up when a forward run command is input.
REV: Lights up when a reverse run command is input.
SEQ: Lights up when any other run command source than the digital operator is selected
REF: Lights up when any other frequency reference source than the digital operator is selected
ALARM: Lights up when an error or alarm has occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter numbers, and settings.
Mode Display (displayed at the upper left of data display)
DRIVE: Lights up in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lights up in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lights up in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE:Lights up in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting parameters, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
3
Fig 3.22 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in
Key Name
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Table 3.17 Key Functions
Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This key can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter o2-01.
MENU Key Selects modes.
ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER key was pressed.
3-
3
3
-4
Key
JOG Key
Name
Table 3.17 Key Functions (Continued)
Function
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is operated from the Digital
Operator.
FWD/REV Key
Shift/RESET Key
Increment Key
Decrement Key
DATA/ENTER Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the active digit when programming parameters.
Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and increments set values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and decrements set values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
Pressed to enter menu items, parameters, and set values.
Also used to switch from one screen to another.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting parameter o2-02.
Note: Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to the key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN key indicator will flash and the STOP key indicator will light during initial excitation or DC braking. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in
Inverter output frequency
Frequency setting
: Light up : Blinking : Not light up
Fig 3.23 RUN and STOP Indicators
Digital Operator JVOP-160
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's parameters and monitoring functions are organized in five groups that make it easier to read and adjust parameters.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the
Drive mode
Mode
Table 3.18 Modes
Primary function(s)
Use this mode to start/stop the inverter, to monitor values such as the frequency references or output current and for displaying fault information or the fault history.
Quick programming mode
Advanced programming mode
Use this mode to read and set the basic parameters.
Use this mode to reference and set all parameters.
Verify mode
Autotuning mode*
Use this mode to read/set parameters that have been changed from their factory-set values.
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor data in the vector control modes. The motor data are measured/calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating in the vector control modes.
3
3-
5
3
-6
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed. Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch through the modes in sequence.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter a mode and to switch from a monitor display to the setting display.
Display During Run
Rdy
U1 01 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
Monitor Display
Setting Display
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
ESC
Rdy
U1 - 01=50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
RESET
Rdy
U101 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
V/f Control
"0"
*0*
ESC
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=0
Select Language
RESET
-ADV-
Select Language
A100 = 0
English
"0"
*0*
ESC ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A1-00 = 0
English
"0"
*0*
-VERIFY-
None Modified
The constant number will be displayed if a constant has been changed. Press the
DATA/ENTER key to enable the change.
ESC
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T101 = 0
*0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
ESC
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
V/f Control
"0"
*0*
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01= 0
*0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
Fig 3.24 Mode Transitions
To run the inverter after viewing/changing parameters press the MENU key and the DATA/ENTER key in sequence to enter the Drive mode. A Run command is not accepted as long as the drive is in any other mode.
To enable Run commands from the terminals during programming set parameter b1-08 to “1”.
Digital Operator JVOP-160
Drive Mode
The Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. All monitor parameters (U1-) as well as fault information and the fault history can be displayed in this mode
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the selected frequency reference value (d1-) can be changed in the frequency setting display using the Increment, Decrement, Shift/RESET and Enter keys. The parameter will be written and the display returns to the Monitor display.
Example Operations
Example key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Display During Running
Rdy
U1 01 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
Monitor Display
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
A B
Rdy
U1 - 01=50.00Hz
RESET
ESC
1 2
Rdy
U101 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
ESC
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
Rdy
U1 - 02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
RESET
ESC
Rdy
U102 =50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
Rdy
U1 - 55 = 11
U1-01=50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
Rdy
U2 - 01=OC
U2-02= OV
U2-03=50.00Hz
RESET
ESC
RESET
ESC
-DRIVE-
No of Travels
U155 = 11
Rdy
U1-01=50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
1
3
2
4
Rdy
U2 01 = OC
U2-02=OV
U2-03=50.00Hz
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-DRIVE-
Fault Trace
U2 - 02 = OV
Rdy
U3-03=50.00Hz
U3-04=50.00Hz
RESET
U3 - 01= OC
U3-02= OV
U3-03= OH
Rdy
ESC
RESET
ESC
Rdy
U2 02 = OV
U3-03=50.00Hz
U3-04=50.00Hz
3 4
5 6
Rdy
U3 01 = OC
U3-02=OV
U3-03=OH
Rdy
U1 - 01= 0 50.00Hz
(0.00 ~ 50.00)
" 00.00Hz "
ESC
The Frequency Setting
Display will not be displayed when using an analog reference.
The fault name will be displayed if the DATA/ENTER
Key is pressed while a constant is being displayed for which a fault code is being displayed.
ESC
ESC
ESC
Frequency Setting Display
U2 - 01= OC
Over Current
U2 - 02= OV
Rdy
DC Bus Overvolt
U3 - 01= OC
Rdy
Over Current
U3 - 02= OV
Rdy
DC Bus Overvolt
Rdy
U3 - 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
RESET
ESC
Rdy
U3 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
5 6
A B
Fig 3.25 Operations in Drive Mode
ESC
3
3-
7
3
-8
Note: 1. When changing the display with the Increment / Decrement keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the first parameter number and vice versa. For example, the next display after the one for U1-01 will be U1-55. This is indicated in the figures by the letters A and B and the numbers 1 to 6.
2. The display for the first monitor parameter (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON. The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the basic parameters required for the elevator operation like speeds, acceleration/deceleration times etc. can be monitored and set.
The parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the frequency. The parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to
for details on the parameters displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Example key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
A B
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
*0*
V/f Control
"0"
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
*0*
V/f Control
"0"
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
-QUICK-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 1.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50"
ESC
-QUICK-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 01.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50"
MENU
-QUICK-
Decel Time 1
C1-01 = 1.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50" -VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
ESC
C1-01 = 0 01.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50"
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-QUICK-
Mtr Rated Power
E2-11 = 4.00kW
(0.00 ~ 650.00)
"4.00kW"
ESC
-QUICK-
Mtr Rated Power
E2-11 = 0 04.00kW
(0.00 ~ 650.00)
"4.00kW"
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01=1
"1"
*1*
Std Fan Cooled
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01 = 1
"1"
*1*
Std Fan Cooled
ESC
A B
Fig 3.26 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
Digital Operator JVOP-160
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set.
A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter will be saved and the display will return to monitor display when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
for details on the parameters.
Example Operations
Example key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
A B
1 2
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
ESC
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 -00=0
Select Language
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A1 00 = 0
English
"0"
*0*
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A1-02 =
English
"0"
0 *0*
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 02 =0
Control Method
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Control Method
A1 02 = 0
V/f Control
"0"
*0*
1
3
2
4
ESC
-ADV-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
V/f Control
"0"
*0*
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
Accel/Decel
C1 01 = 1.50sec
Accel Time 1
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Accel/Decel
C1 02 = 1.50sec
Accel Time 1
RESET
ESC
A B
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1 01 = 1.5sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 2
C1 02 = 1.5sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
3 4
ESC
ESC
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C101 = 0 01.5sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 2
C102 = 0 01.5sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
Fig 3.27 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
3
3-
9
3
-10
Setting Parameters
Here the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 1.5 s to 2.5 s is shown.
Step
No.
1
2
Table 3.19 Setting Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode
Digital Operator Display
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
Rdy
U1 01 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
Power supply turned ON.
Description
3
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
Press the MENU key 3 times to enter the advanced programming mode.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 -00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
Accel / Decel
C1 -00 = 1.50sec
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 01.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0
0 1.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 0 1 .50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 0
2 .50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Entry Accepted
Press the DATA/ENTER to access the monitor display.
Press the Increment or Decrement key to display the parameter
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the setting display. The current setting value of C1-01 is displayed.
Press the Shift/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.
Press the Increment key to change set value to 2.50 s.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to save the set data.
“Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1 sec after pressing the
DATA/ENTER key.
12
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C101 = 2.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
The display returns to the monitor display for C1-01.
Digital Operator JVOP-160
Verify Mode
The Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
The parameter A1-02 is the only parameter from the A1- group, which will be displayed in the modified constant list if it has been changed before. The other parameters will not be displayed, even if they are different from the default setting.
In the verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming mode. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change a setting. When the DATA/ENTER key is pressed the parameter setting are written and the display returns to the Monitor display.
Example Operations
In the example below the following settings have been changed from their default settings:
•
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1)
•
•
•
C1-02 (Acceleration Time 2)
E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting)
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
ESC
A B
C1-01 = 002.0sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
C1-02 = 002.0sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-VERIFY-
Input Voltage
E1-01=390VAC
(310~510)
"380VAC"
E2-01= 7.20A
(0.80 ~ 16.00)
"7.00A"
A B
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
C1-01 = 0 02.0sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
C1-02 = 0 02.0sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-VERIFY-
Input Voltage
E1-01= 3 90VAC
(310~510)
"380VAC"
E2-01 = 00 7 .20A
(0.80 ~ 16.00)
"7.00A"
Fig 3.28 Operations in Verify Mode
3
3-
11
3
-12
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically measures and sets the required motor data in order to achieve the maximum performance. Always perform autotuning before starting operation when using the vector control modes.
When V/f control has been selected, stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be selected only.
When the motor cannot be operated (e.g. if the ropes cannot be removed from the traction sheave), and Open
Loop or Closed Loop Vector Control shall be used, perform stationary autotuning.
Example of Operation for V/f control
The tuning method for V/f control is fixed to the measurement of the terminal resistance (T1-01=1). Input the the rated output power and the rated current specified on the nameplate of the motor and then press the RUN key. The motor data are measured automatically.
Always set the above items. Otherwise autotuning cannot be started, e.g. it cannot be started from the motor rated voltage input display.
A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter will be saved when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
The following flowchart shows a V/f control Autotuning example.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1 01 =2 *2*
Term Resistance
"2"
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Mtr Rated Power
T1 02 = 4.00kW
(0.00~650.00)
"4.00kW"
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Rated Current
T1 04 = 7.00A
(0.80 ~ 16.00A)
"7.00A"
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
Rdy
0.0Hz/0.0A
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
RUN
The display will automatically change depending on the status of autotuning.
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
01 = 2 *2*
Term Resistance
"2"
-A.TUNE-
Mtr Rated Power
T1-02 = 0 04.00kW
(0.0~400.0)
"4.00kW"
-A.TUNE-
Rated Current
T1-04 = 0 07.00A
(0.80 ~ 16.00A)
"7.00A"
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
40.0Hz/10.5A
START GOAL
STOP
STOP key
Fig 3.29 Operation in Autotuning Mode
If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
40.0Hz/10.5A
START GOAL
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
Tune Successful
-A.TUNE-
Tune Successful
User Parameters
This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Inverter.
User Parameter Descriptions.......................................4-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........4-3
User Parameter Tables................................................4-7
4
4
-2
User Parameter Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user parameter tables.
Description of User Parameter Tables
User parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an example.
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
Page b1-01
Reference selection
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator/Monitor
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3 0 No Q Q Q 180H -
• Parameter Number:
• Name:
• Display
• Description:
• Setting Range:
• Factory Setting:
• Change during Operation:
• Control Methods:
• MEMOBUS Register:
• Page:
The number of the user parameter.
The name of the user parameter.
The display shown in the Digital Operator JVOP-160
Details on the function or settings of the user parameter.
The setting range for the user parameter.
The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed.)
page 4-51, Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
for factory settings that are changed by setting the control method.
Indicates whether the parameter can be changed or not while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes are possible during operation.
No: Changes are not possible during operation.
Indicates the control methods in which the user parameter can be monitored or set.
Q: The item can be monitored and set as well in quick programming mode as in advanced programming mode.
A: The item can be monitored and set in advanced programming mode only.
No: The item cannot be monitored or set in this control method.
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter.
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator/Monitor display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU
Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum parameters required for operation can be monitored or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All parameters can be monitored or set.
Verify Mode
Parameters changed from the default settings can be monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor parameters for vector control or measures the line-to-line resistance for V/f control.
Function
Status Monitor Parameters
Fault Trace
Fault History
Initialize Mode
User-specified Setting Mode
Operation Mode Selections
DC Injection Braking
Timer Function
Dwell Functions
Acceleration/Deceleration
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
Motor Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Speed Control (ASR)
Carrier Frequency
Speed References
Field Forcing
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
PG Option Setup
Analog Momitor Card
Digital Output Card
Serial Communications Settings
Multi-function Digital Inputs
Multi-function Digital Outputs
Multi-function Analog Inputs
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ridethrough
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Torque Limits
Hardware Protection
Automatic Frequency Regulator
Monitor Selection
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions
Copy Function
Brake Sequence
Slip Compensation
Special Sequence Functions
Motor Autotuning
L1
L2
L3
F6
H1
H2
H3 d6
E1
E2
F1
F4
F5
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6 d1 b4 b6
C1
A1
A2 b1 b2 o1 o2 o3
S1
S2
S3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
N2
T1
No.
U1
U2
U3
Page
4
4-
3
4
-4
User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode. The user parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user parameters, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
A1-02
C1-01
C1-02
Control method selection
Control Method
Sets the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
2: Open-Loop Vector control
3: Closed Loop Vector control
Acceleration time 1 Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output fre-
Accel Time 1 quency.
Deceleration time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0
Decel Time 1
Hz.
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-Crv Acc @ Start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
S-Crv Acc @ End
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
S-Crv Dec @ Start
When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
C2-04
C2-05
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-06
0 to 3
0.0 to
600.00
*1
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0
1.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
S-Crv Dec @ End
S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed
Scurve @ leveling
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.50 s
0.50 s
ASR proportional
(P) gain 1
ASR P Gain 1
ASR integral time 1
ASR I Time 1
Set the proportional gain 1 and the integral time 1 of the speed control loop
(ASR) for the minimum frequency.
The settings becomes active for acceleration only.
ASR proportional
(P) gain 2
ASR P Gain 2
Set the proportional gain 2 and the integral time 2 of the speed control loop
(ASR) for the maximum frequency.
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR I Time 2
ASR delay time
ASR Delay Time
0.00 to
300.00
*1
0.000 to
10.000
0.00 to
300.00
*1
0.000 to
10.000
Sets the filter time constant; the time from the speed loop to the torque command output. Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
0.000 to
0.500
40.00
*2
0.500 s
*2
20.00
*2
0.500 s
*2
0.004
ms
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Control Methods
MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Registe r
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
102H
200H
201H
20BH
20CH
20DH
20EH
232H
21BH
21CH
21DH
21EH
220H
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Parameter Number
C5-09
C5-10 d1-09
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
ASR proportional
(P) gain 3
ASR P Gain 3
ASR integral (I) time 3
ASR I Time 3
Set the proportional gain 3 and the integral time 3 of the speed control loop
(ASR) for the minimum frequency.
The settings becomes active for deceleration only.
Nominal speed reference
Nomin Speed vn
Sets the frequency reference when the nominal speed is selected by a digital input.
0.00 to
300.00
40.00
*2
0.000 to
10.000
0.500 s
*2
50.00 Hz
Yes
Yes
Yes d1-14 d1-17
E1-01
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
Inspection speed reference
Inspect Speed vi
Leveling speed reference
Level Speed vl
Sets the frequency reference when the inspection speed is selected by a digital input
Sets the frequency reference when the leveling speed is selected by a digital input
Input voltage setting
Input
Voltage
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
Max Frequency
Sets the inverter input voltage. This set value will be the basis for the protection functions.
Max. voltage
(VMAX)
Max Voltage
Base frequency
(FA)
Base Frequency
Mid. output frequency voltage
(VB)
Mid voltage A
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Min Frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
(VMIN)
Min Voltage
Motor rated current Sets the motor rated current in Amps.
This set value becomes the base value for
Mtr Rated Power motor protection and torque limit. It is an input data for autotuning.
Motor rated slip
Motor Rated Slip
Sets the motor rated slip.
This set value will become the reference value for the slip compensation.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor no-load current
No-Load Current
Sets the motor no-load current.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Number of motor poles
Number of Poles
Sets the number of motor poles. It is an input data for autotuning.
0 to
120.00
155 to
255
*2
40.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
*2
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255
*1
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
1.75 to
35.00
*4
0.00 to
20.00
0.00 to
13.99
*3
2 to 48
25.00 Hz Yes
4.00 Hz Yes
200 V
*2
50.0 Hz No
190.0 V
*2
50.0 Hz
*3
12.5 V
*1 *2
0.3 Hz
*3
2.5 V
*1 *2
14.00 A
*5
2.73 Hz
*2
4.50 A
*2
4
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Registe r
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
22EH
231H
288H
28FH
292H
300H
303H
304H
305H
No 307H
A 308H
No 309H
Q
Q
Q
Q
30EH
30FH
310H
311H
4
4-
5
4
-6
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
E2-05
E2-11
F1-01
F1-05
L1-01
Motor line-to-line resistance
Term Resistance
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor rated output power
Mtr Rated Power
Sets the rated output power of the motor.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
PG constant
PG Pulses/Rev
PG rotation
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution
PG Rotation Sel
Motor protection selection
MOL Select
0: Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command.)
1: Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command.)
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: Protection for general purpose motor
(fan cooled)
2: Protection for frequency converter motor (external cooled)
3: Protection for special vector control motor
0.000
to
65.000
0.00 to
650.00
0 to
60000
0 or 1
0 to 3
0.771
Ω
*2
3.70
*3
1024
0
1
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Registe r
Q
Q
No
No
Q
Q
Q
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
312H
318H
380H
384H
480H
* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to
0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 3. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
* 4. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 5. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)
* 6. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)
User Parameter Tables
User Parameter Tables
A: Setup Settings
Initialize Mode: A1
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
A1-00
Language selection for Digital
Operator display
Select
Language
Used to select the language displayed on the Digital Operator
(JVOP-160 only).
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation.
A1-01
Parameter access level
Access Level
Used to set the parameter access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting A1-
01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user parameters (Only parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Parameters can be read and set in both, quick programming mode (Q) and advanced programming mode (A).)
A1-02
A1-03
Control method selection
Control Method
Used to select the control method for the Inverter
0: V/f control
2: Open loop vector
3: Closed Loop Vector
This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation.
Initialize
Init Parameters
Used to initialize the parameters using the specified method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the user parameters
2220: Initializes using a twowire sequence.
(Initializes to the factory setting.)
Setting
Range
0 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to
2220
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
2
0
0
Yes
Yes
No
No
Control Methods
V/ f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
100H
101H
102H
103H
–
-
-
A1-04
Password
Enter Password
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some parameters of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed, A1-
01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 parameters can no longer be changed. (Programming mode parameters can be changed.)
0 to
9999
0 No A A A 104H
4
4-
7
4
-8
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display
A1-05
Password setting
Select Password
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
Usually this parameter is not displayed. When the Password (A1-
04) is displayed, hold down the
RESET key and press the Menu key. The password will be displayed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to
9999
0 No
Control Methods
V/ f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A A A 105H
User-set Parameters: A2
The parameters set by the user are listed in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
Page
A2-01 to
A2-32
User specified parameters
User Param 1 to
32
Used to select the function for each of the user specified parameters. User parameters are the only accessible parameters if Parameter Access Level is set to user parameters (A1-01=1) b1-01 to
S3-01
– No A A A
106H to
125H
User Parameter Tables
Application Parameters: b
Operation Mode Selections: b1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description b1-01 b1-02 b1-06 b1-08
Reference source selection
Reference
Source
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator/Monitor
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
RUN command source selection
Run Source
Control input scan
Cntl Input
Scans
Sets the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator/Monitor
1: Control circuit terminal
(digital multifunction inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs (forward/ reverse and multi-function inputs.)
0: Fast reading
1: Normal reading (Can be used for possible malfunction due to noise.)
Run command selection in programming modes
RUN CMD at
PRG
Used to set an operation prohibition in programming modes.
0: Operation prohibited.
1: Operation permitted
(Disabled when Digital
Operator/Monitor is the selected Run command source
(b1-02 = 0)).
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
1
1
1
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
180H
181H
185H
187H
-
-
DC Injection Braking: b2
Name
Parameter Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation b2-08
Magnetic flux compensation volume
Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the noload current.
Field Comp
0 to
1000
0% No No
Control Methods MEMO-
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
BUS
Register
Page
A No 190H -
4
4-
9
4
-10
Timer Function: b4
Param eter
Number
Name Description b4-01
Timer function
ON-delay time
Delay-ON
Timer
Sets the timer function output ONdelay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2-.
b4-02
Timer function
OFF-delay time
Delay-OFF
Timer
Sets the timer function output OFFdelay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2-.
Setting
Range
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0 to
3000.0
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
0.0 s
0.0 s
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
1A3H
1A4H
Page
Dwell Functions: b6
Parameter
Number
Name
Display b6-01
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell Ref @
Start b6-02
Dwell time at start
Dwell Time
@ Start b6-03
Dwell frequency at stop
Dwell Ref @
Stop b6-04
Dwell time at stop
Dwell Time
@ Stop
Description
Run command
Output frequency
ON
OFF b6-02 b6-01 b6-03 b6-04
Time
The dwell function can be used to hold the output frequency temporarily.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 Hz
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 Hz
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1B6H
1B7H
1B8H
1B9H
User Parameter Tables
Tuning Parameters: C
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Display
C1-01
Acceleration time 1 Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the
Accel Time 1 maximum output frequency.
C1-02
Deceleration time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum
Decel Time 1 output frequency to 0 Hz.
C1-03
Acceleration time 2 Sets the acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/
Accel Time 2 decel time 1” is set to ON.
C1-04
Deceleration time 2 Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/
Decel Time 2 decel time 1” is set to ON.
C1-07
Acceleration time 4 Sets the acceleration time when
Accel Time 4 the frequency reference is below the value set in C1-11.
0.00 to
600.00
*1
C1-08
Deceleration time 4 Sets the deceleration time when the frequency reference is
Decel Time 4 below the value set in C1-11.
C1-09
Emergency stop time
Fast Stop Time
Sets the deceleration time when the frequency reference is below the value set in C1-11.
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
1.50 s
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
200H
201H
202H
203H
206H
207H
208H
C1-10
Accel/decel time setting unit
Acc/Dec Units
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
C1-11
Accel/decel time switching frequency
Acc/Dec SW Freq
Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
If the output frequency is below the set frequency: Accel/decel time 4
If the output frequency is above the set frequency: Accel/decel time 1.
0 or 1
0.0 to
120.0
0
0.0 Hz
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
209H
20AH
-
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10. If C1-10 is set to 1, the setting range for acceleration/deceleration times becomes 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds.
4
4-
11
4
-12
S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
C2-01
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-Crv Acc @
Start
0.00 to
2.50
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
Set the S-curve times at speed changes to reduce the jerk. The S-curves can be set separately for every kind of speed change.
S-Crv Acc @
End
C2-02 C2-03
0.00 to
2.50
0.50 s
0.50 s
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
20BH
20CH
Page
C2-03
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
C2-01
C2-04
C2-05
Time
S-Crv Dec @
Start
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
S-Crv Dec @
End
T accel
= C2-01
2
T decel
= C2-03
2
When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
C2-05
S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed
Scurve @ leveling
0.00 to
2.50
0.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
20DH
20EH
232H
User Parameter Tables
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
Parameter Number
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Slip compensation gain
Slip Comp Gain
Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust this parameter under the following circumstances.
• When motor speed is lower than the frequency reference increase the set value.
• When motor speed is higher than the frequency reference decrease the set value.
In Closed Loop Vector control this value is the gain for compensating the slip caused by temperature variation.
0.0 to 2.5
1.0
Slip compensation delay time
Slip Comp Time
Sets the Slip Compensation delay time.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust this parameter under the following circumstances.
• Reduce the setting when Slip
Compensation responsiveness is low.
• When speed is not stable, increase the setting.
Slip compensation limit
Slip Comp Limit
Sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip.
0 to
10000
0 to
250
2000 ms
200%
Yes
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
20FH
210H
211H
C3-04
Slip compensation selection during regeneration
Slip Comp Regen
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation during regeneration function has been activated and regeneration capacity increases momentarily, it might be necessary to use a braking option
(braking resistor, braking resistor unit or braking unit.)
C3-05
Output voltage limit operation selection
Output V limit Sel
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux will be lowered automatically when the output voltage become saturated.)
0 or 1
0 or 1
1
1
No
No
A
No
A
A
No
A
212H
213H
4
4-
13
4
-14
Torque Compensation: C4
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Display
C4-01
Torque compensation gain
Torq Comp Gain
Sets the torque compensation gain.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust it under the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (Max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set values.
• When the motor is oscillating, decrease the set values.
Adjust the torque compensation gain so that at minimum speed the output current does not exceed the Inverter rated output current.
Do not change the torque compensation gain from its default
(1.00) when using Open Loop
Vector control.
0.00 to
2.50
C4-02
Torque compensation delay time constant
Torq Comp Time
The torque compensation delay time is set in ms units.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust it under the following circumstances:
• When the motor is oscillating, increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of the motor is low, decrease the set values.
C4-03
Starting torque compensation
(FWD)
Sets the torque compensation value at start in FWD direction
FTorqCmp @ Start
0 to
10000
0.0 to
200.0%
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
1.00
200 ms
*
0.0%
Yes
No
No
A
A
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
215H
216H
217H
C4-04
Starting torque compensation
(REV)
RTorqCmp @ Start
Sets the torque compensation value at start in REV direction
-200.0% to 0.0
0.0%
C4-05
Starting torque compensation time constant
TorqCmpDelayT
Sets starting torque start-up time.
When 0 ~ 4 ms is set, it is operated without filter.
0 to 200 10 ms
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
218H
219H
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
User Parameter Tables
Speed Control (ASR): C5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
ASR propor-
C5-01
C5-02
ASR P Gain 1
ASR integral (I) time 1
ASR I Time 1 loop (ASR) for the minimum frequency.
The settings becomes active for acceleration only.
1.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000
40.00
0.500 s
Yes
Yes
C5-03
C5-04
ASR proportional (P) gain 2 Set the proportional gain 2 and the
ASR P Gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2 integral time 2 of the speed control loop (ASR) for the maximum frequency.
ASR I Time 2
1.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000
C5-06
ASR delay time Sets the filter time constant; the time from the speed loop to the torque
ASR Delay Time command output. Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
0.000 to
0.500
20.00
0.500 s Yes
0.004
Yes
No
C5-08
ASR integral (I) limit
ASR I Limit
Set the parameter to a small value to prevent any radical load change. A setting of 100% is equal to the maximum output frequency.
0 to 400 400%
ASR propor-
C5-09
C5-10
ASR P Gain 3
ASR integral (I) time 3
ASR I Time 3 loop (ASR) for the minimum frequency.
The settings becomes active for deceleration only.
1.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000
40.00
0.500 s
No
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
No No
No No
No No
No No
No No
No No
No No
No No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
21BH
21CH
21DH
21EH
220H
222H
22EH
231H
Page
Carrier Frequency: C6
Parameter
Number
Name
Description
Display
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
CarrierFreq Sel
Selects the carrier frequency.
1: 2 kHz
2: 5 kHz
3: 8 kHz
4: 10 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15 kHz
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
1 to 6 3 No A A A 224H
4
4-
15
4
-16
Reference Parameters: d
Preset Reference: d1
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-14 d1-17
Frequency reference 1
Reference 1
Frequency reference 2
Reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Reference 3
Frequency reference 4
Reference 4
Sets the frequency reference.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 1 is ON for a multi-function input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 2 is ON for a multi-function input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and
2 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Frequency reference 5
Reference 5
Frequency reference 6
Reference 6
Sets the frequency when multi-step speed command 3 is ON for a multi-function input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and
3 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Frequency reference 7
Reference 7
Frequency reference 8
Reference 8
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 2 and
3 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1, 2, and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Nominal speed Sets the frequency reference when the nominal speed is selected by a
Nomin Speed vn digital input.
Intermediate speed 1
Interm Speed v1
Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 1 is selected by a digital input.
0 to
120.00
*1*2
Intermediate speed 2
Interm Speed v2
Intermediate speed 3
Interm Speed v3
Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 2 is selected by a digital input.
Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 3 is selected by a digital input.
Releveling speed Sets the frequency reference when the releveling speed is selected by
Relevel Speed vr a digital input.
Inspection speed Sets the frequency reference when the inspection speed is selected by
Inspect Speed vi a digital input.
Leveling Speed Sets the frequency reference when the leveling speed is selected by a
Level Speed vl digital input.
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
50.00 Hz Yes
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
25.00 Hz Yes
4.00 Hz
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
280H
281H
282H
283H
284H
285H
286H
287H
288H
28BH
28CH
28DH
28EH
28FH
292H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page d1-18
Speed priority selection
SpeedPrioritySel
Speed reference priority selection
0: Use Multi-Speed reference
(d1-01 to d1-08)
1: High Speed reference has
priority.
2: Leveling speed reference
has priority.
0 to 2 1 Yes A A A 292H
* 1. The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz). If the display unit is changed, the setting range values also change
* 2. The maximum setting value depends on the setting of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Field Forcing: d6
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display d6-03
Field forcing function selection
Field Force
Sel
Enables or disables field forcing function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Setting
Range
0 or 1 d6-06
Field forcing function
Limit
FieldForce
Limit
Sets the upper limit for the excitation current applied by the field forcing function.
A setting of 100% is equal to the motor no-load current.
Field forcing is active during all types of operation except DC Injection.
100 to
400
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0
400%
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
2A2H
2A5H
4
4-
17
4
-18
Motor Parameters: E
V/f Pattern: E1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
E1-01
E1-04
Input voltage setting
Input
Voltage
Sets the Inverter input voltage.
This setting is used as a reference value for protection functions.
Max. output frequency
(FMAX)
E1-05
E1-06
Max Frequency
Max. output voltage (VMAX)
Max Voltage
Base frequency
(FA)
Base Frequency
Output Voltage (V)
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-13
Mid. output frequency (FB)
Mid Frequency A
Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
Mid Voltage A
Min. output frequency
(FMIN)
Min Frequency
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and
E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-
08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX)
≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07
(FB)
≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
Min Voltage
Base voltage
(VBASE)
Base Voltage
Sets the output voltage of the base frequency (E1-06).
155 to
255
*1
40.0 to
120.0
*2
50.0 Hz No
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
120.0
*2
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255
*1
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
255.0
*1
200 V
*1
190.0 V
*1
50.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
*2
20.0 V
*1 *2
0.5 Hz
*2
12.5 V
*1 *2
0.0 V
*3
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
No
A
No
No
300H
303H
304H
305H
306H
307H
308H
309H
30CH
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (The V/f Control factory settings are given.)
* 3. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
Motor Setup: E2
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display
E2-01
Motor rated current
Motor Rated
FLA
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become the reference value for motor protection and torque limits.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
1.75 to
35.00
*1
14.00 A
*2
No Q Q Q 30EH
User Parameter Tables
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
E2-09
E2-10
E2-11
E2-12
Motor rated slip
Motor Rated
Slip
Sets the motor rated slip.
This set value will become the reference value for the slip compensation.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor noload current
No-Load Current
Sets the motor no-load current.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Number of motor poles
Number of
Poles
Sets the number of motor poles.
This value is an input data for autotuning.
Motor line-toline resistance
Term Resistance
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor leak inductance
Leak Inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Saturation
Comp1
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Saturation
Comp2
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning.
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning.
Motor mechanical losses
Mechanical loss
Sets the motor mechanical losses as a percentage of motor rated output.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust the value under the following the torque loss is large due e.g. to heavy friction in the machine.
The set mechanical loss will be compensated.
Motor iron loss for torque compensation Sets motor iron losses.
Tcomp Iron
Loss
Motor rated output power
Mtr Rated
Power
Sets the rated output power of the motor.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
Motor iron saturation coefficient 3 This parameter is automatically set dur-
Saturation ing rotating autotuning.
Comp3
0.00 to
20.00
0.00 to
13.99
*3
0.000
to
65.000
0.0 to
40.0
0.00 to
0.50
0.50 to
0.75
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
65535
0.00 to
650.00
1.30 to
1.60
2.73 Hz
*2
4.50 A
*2
2 to 48 4 poles
0.771
*2
19.6%
*2
0.50
0.75
0.0%
112 W
*2
3.70
*2
1.30
Ω
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
Q
No
Q
No
No
No
No
A
Q
No
Q
Q
No
Q
A
A
A
No
No
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
No
Q
A
30FH
310H
311H
312H
313H
314H
315H
316H
317H
318H
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
* 3. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
4
4-
19
4
-20
Option Parameters: F
PG Option Setup: F1
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Display
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
F1-05
PG constant
PG Pulses/Rev
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
PG Fdbk Loss
Sel
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, avoid to use this setting.)
Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
PG Overspeed
Sel
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, avoid to use this setting.)
Operation selection at speed deviation
PG
Deviation Sel
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and operation continued.)
PG rotation
PG Rotation Sel
0: Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command; Counter Clockwise rotation)
1: Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command; Clockwise rotation)
0 to
60000
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
1024
1
1
3
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
A
A
A
Q
380H
381H
382H
383H
384H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
F1-06
PG division rate
(PG pulse monitor)
PG Output Ratio
Sets the division ratio for the PG speed control card pulse output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
The first digit of the value of F1-
06 stands for n, the second and the third stands for m.
This parameter is effective only when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio settings are: 1/32
≤ F1-06
≤ 1.
1 to 132
F1-14
PG open-circuit detection delay time
PGO Detect
Time
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time. PGO will be detected if the detection time exceeds the set time.
0.0 to
10.0
1
F1-08
F1-09
Overspeed detection level
PG Overspd
Level
Overspeed detection delay time
PG Overspd
Time
Sets the overspeed detection method.
Motor speeds that continue to exceed the value set in F1-08
(set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) for the time set in F1-09 are detected as overspeed faults.
0 to 120 115%
0.0 to 2.0
0.0 s
F1-10
F1-11
Excessive speed deviation detection level
PG Deviate
Level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
PG Deviate Time
Sets the speed deviation detection method.
Any speed deviation above the
F1-10 set level (set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is detected as a speed deviation.
The speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the speed reference command.
0 to 50
0.0 to
10.0
10%
0.5 s
1.0 s
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
385H
387H
388H
389H
38AH
38DH
4
4-
21
4
-22
Analog Monitor Cards: F4
Parameter
Number
Name
F4-01
Channel 1 monitor selection
AO Ch1 Select
F4-02
Channel 1 gain
AO Ch1 Gain
F4-03
Channel 2 monitor selection
AO Ch2 Select
F4-04
Channel 2 gain
AO Ch2 Gain
F4-05
Channel 1 output monitor bias
AO Ch1 Bias
Channel 2 output monitor bias
F4-06
AO Ch2 Bias
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
Page
Using an AO-08 option card the possible outputs signal is 0 to +10V only. The setting of F4-07 and F4-
08 has no effect.
Sets the channel 1 item bias to
100%/10 V when the analog monitor card is used.
This function is enabled when the analog monitor card is used.
1 to 54
0.0 to
1000.0
1 to 54
Monitor selection: Sets the number of the monitor item to be output.
(Numerical portion of U1-
)
4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 35, 39 and 40 cannot be set.
-110.0 to
110.0
Gain: Sets the percentage of the monitor item, which is equal to 10V output.
0.0 to
1000.0
2
100.0% Yes
3
50.0%
0.0%
No
No
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
391H
392H
393H
394H
395H
-
-
-
-
-
Bias: Sets the percentage of the monitor item, which is equal to 0V output.
-110.0 to
110.0
0.0% Yes A A A 396H
-
F4-07
Analog output signal level for channel 1
AO Opt Level Sel
Selects the analog output signal level for channel 1 (effective for the
AO-12 option card only).
Analog output signal level for channel 2
0: 0 to 10V
1:-10 to +10
F4-08
AO Opt Level Sel
Using an AO-08 option card the possible outputs signal is 0 to +10V only. The setting of F4-07 and F4-
08 has no effect.
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
397H
398H
-
-
User Parameter Tables
Digital Output Card (DO-02 and DO-08): F5
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMO
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
BUS
Register
Page
F5-01
Channel 1 output selection
DO Ch1 Select
F5-02
Channel 2 output selection
DO Ch2 Select
F5-03
Channel 3 output selection
DO Ch3 Select
F5-04
Channel 4 output selection
DO Ch4 Select
F5-05
Channel 5 output selection
DO Ch5 Select
F5-06
Channel 6 output selection
DO Ch6 Select
F5-07
Channel 7 output selection
DO Ch7 Select
F5-08
Channel 8 output selection
DO Ch8 Select
DO-08 output mode selection
F5-09
DO-08 Selection
Effective when a Digital Output
Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a Digital Output
Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 42
0 to 42
0 to 42
0 to 42
0 to 42
0 to 42
0 to 42
0 to 42
0 to 2
0
1
2
4
6
37
0F
0F
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
399H
39AH
39BH
39CH
39DH
39EH
39FH
3A0H
3A1H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4
4-
23
4
-24
Serial Communications Settings: F6
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
F6-05
F6-06
Operation selection after communications error
Comm Bus Fault
Sel
Sets the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
Input level of external error from Communications Option
Card
EF0 Detection
0: Always detect
1: Detect during operation
Stopping method for external error from Communications Option
Card
EF0 Fault Action
0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
Current monitor unit selection
Current Unit Sel
Sets the unit of current monitor
0: Ampere
1: 100%/8192
Torque reference/torque limit selection from communications option card
Torque Ref/Lmt
Sel
0: Torque reference/torque limit by communications option disabled.
1: Torque reference/torque limit by communications option enabled.
Setting
Range
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
1
0
1
0
1
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A2H
3A3H
3A4H
3A6H
3A7H
Page
-
-
-
-
-
User Parameter Tables
Terminal Function Parameters: H
Multi-function Digital Inputs: H1
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display
H1-01
Terminal S3 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
H1-02
Terminal S4 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
H1-03
Terminal S5 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
H1-04
Terminal S6 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
H1-05
Terminal S7 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
Multi-function input 1
Multi-function input 2
Multi-function input 3
Multi-function input 4
Multi-function input 5
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to 88 80 No A A A 400H
0 to 88 84
0 to 88 81
0 to 88 83
0 to 88 F
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
401H
402H
403H
404H
Multi-function Digital Input Functions
Setting
Value
3
4
5
Multi-step speed reference 1
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Function
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Page
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
8
9
6
7
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Accel/decel time 1 switchover
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
15 Emergency stop. (NO: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when ON.)
17 Emergency stop (NC: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when OFF)
18
Timer function input (the times are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function output is set in H2-.)
1A Accel/decel time switchover 2
Yes Yes Yes
-
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
-
-
-
Yes Yes Yes
-
-
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
20 to 2F External fault; Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation Yes Yes Yes
80 Nominal Speed Selection (d1-09) Yes Yes Yes
81 Intermediate Speed Selection (d1-10)
82 Releveling Speed Selection (d1-13)
Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes
83 Leveling Speed Selection (d1-17)
84 Inspection Run Selection (d1-14)
85 Battery Operation Selection
86 Output Contactor Answer Back Signal
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
4
4-
25
4
-26
Setting
Value
87 High Speed Limit Switch (UP)
88 High Speed Limit Switch (Down)
Function
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Page
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display
H2-01
Terminal M1-
M2 function selection
Multi-function contact output 1
Term
M1-M2 Sel
H2-02
Terminal M3-
M4 function selection
Multi-function contact output 2
Term
M3-M4 Sel
H2-03
Terminal M5-
M6 function selection
Multi-function contact output 3
Term
M5-M6 Sel
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to 43
0 to 43
0 to 43
40
41
6
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
40BH
40CH
40DH
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
Setting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
Open loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Page
Yes
0
1
A
B
D
8
9
6
7
2
3
4
5
E
During run 1 (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
Zero-speed f ref
/f out
agree 1 (detection width L4-02 is used.) f ref
/f set
agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used and during frequency agree)
Frequency detection 1 (ON: +L4-01
≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used)
Frequency detection 2 (ON: Output frequency
≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used)
F Not used. (Set when the terminal is not used.)
10 Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
11 Fault reset command active
12 Timer function output
13 f ref
/f set
agree 2 (detection width L4-04 is used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Inverter operation ready; READY: After initialization or no faults
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
During baseblock (NO contact, ON: during baseblock)
Frequency reference source selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Run command source selection status (ON: Run command from Operator) Yes Yes
Car stuck/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact, ON: Overtorque/undertorque detection) Yes Yes
Yes Yes Braking transistor fault
Fault (ON: Digital Operator/Monitor communications error or fault other than CPF00 and
CPF01 has occurred.)
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes -
Yes
Yes -
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
User Parameter Tables
Setting
Value
Function
14 f ref
/f set
agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, with detection width L4-04 is used, and during frequency agree)
15 Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency
≤ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is used)
16 Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency
≥ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is used)
17 Car stuck/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)
18 Car stuck/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact, ON: Torque detection)
19 Car stuck/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)
1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
1D During regenerative operation
1E Restart enabled (ON: Automativ fault restart enabled)
1F Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
31 During speed limit
33 Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-Servo completed)
37
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)
38 During cooling fan operation
40 Brake Release Command
41 Output Contactor Cloase Command
42 Speed detection at deceleration (Door zone)
43 Not Zero Speed
Control Methods
V/f
Open loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Page
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes
Yes Yes Yes -
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes -
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes -
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
4
4-
27
4
-28
Analog Inputs: H3
Constant
Number
H3-01
H3-02
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMO
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
BUS
Register
Page
AI-14B Channel 1 signal level selection
AI-14 CH1 LvlSel
Selects the input signal level of
Channel 1 if an AI-14B option card is installed.
0: 0 to +10V
1: -10 to +10V
AI-14B Channel 1 gain
AI-14 CH1 Gain
Sets the frequency reference value when 10 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.
0 or 1
0.0 to
1000.0
0 No
100.0% Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
410H
411H
H3-03
H3-04
H3-05
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
AI-14B Channel 1 bias
AI-14 CH1 Bias
AI-14B Channel 3 signal level selection
AI-14 CH3 LvlSel
Selects the input signal level of
Channel 3 if an AI-14B option card is installed.
0: 0 to 10V
1: -10 to +10V
AI-14B Channel 3 function selection
AI-14 CH3FuncSel
Sets the frequency reference value when 0 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.
Selects the function for the channel 3 input if an AI-14B option card is installed. See the table below for the available functions.
AI-14B Channel3 gain
AI-14 CH3 Gain
AI-14B Channel 3
Bias
AI-14 CH3 Bias
Sets the input level according to the 100% value of the function set in parameter H3-05 when the voltage at channel 3 of the
AI-14B option card is 10 V .
Sets the input level according to the 0% value of the function set in parameter H3-05 when the voltage at channel 3 of the
AI-14B option card is 0 V.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0 or 1
2,3,14
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0 to
+100.0
0.0%
0
2
100.0%
0.0%
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
AI-14B Channel 2 signal level selection
AI-14 CH2 LvlSel
Selects the input signal level of
Channel 2 if an AI-14B option card is installed.
0: 0 to 10V
1: -10 to +10V
2: 4 to 20 mA.
If current input is selected, channel 2 must be set to current input by hardware as well. Refer to the
AI-14B manual.
AI-14B Channel 2 function selection
AI-14 CH2FuncSel
Selects the function for the channel 2 input if an AI-14B option card is installed. See the table below for the available functions.
0 to 2
2, 3, 14
AI-14B Channel 2
Gain
AI-14 CH2 Gain
AI-14B Channel 2
Bias
AI-14 CH2 Bias
Sets the input level according to the 100% value of the function set in parameter H3-09 when the voltage/current at channel 2 of the AI-14B option card is 10V/
20mA.
Sets the input level according to the 0% value of the function set in parameter H3-09 when the voltage/current at channel 2 of the AI-14B option card is 0V/
0mA.
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0
3
100.0% Yes
0.0%
No
No
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
412H
413H
414H
415H
416H
417H
418H
419H
41AH
User Parameter Tables
Constant
Number
Name
Display
H3-12
Analog input filter time constant
CH1-3 FilterTime
H3-15
Terminal A1 function selection
Terminal A1 Func
H3-16
Terminal A1 input gain
Terminal A1 Gain
H3-17
Terminal A1 input bias
Terminal A1 Bias
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMO
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
BUS
Register
Page
Sets delay filter time constant for the three analog input channels of the AI-14B option card .
Effective for noise control etc.
0.00 to
2.00
0.03
s
No A A A 41BH
Sets the multi-function analog input function for terimnal A1.
0: Frequency Reference
1: Torque compensation
Sets the frequency reference value when 10 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.
0 or 1
0.0 to
1000.0
Sets the frequency reference value when 0 V is input as a percentage of the maximum frequency set in E1-04.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0
100.0% Yes
0.0%
No
Yes
No No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
434H
435H
436H
H3-05,H3-09 Settings
Setting
Value
Function Contents (100%)
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vectorop
Closed
Loop
Vector
Page
Maximum output frequency (AI-14B use only) Yes Yes Yes 2
3
Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as multi speed reference 2)
Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as multi speed reference 3)
14 Torque compensation
Maximum output frequency (AI-14B use only) Yes Yes Yes
Motor’s rated torque No No Yes
-
4
4-
29
4
-30
Protection Function Parameters: L
Motor Overload: L1
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display
L1-01
L1-02
Motor protection selection
MOL Fault
Select
Sets whether the motor thermal overload protection function is enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection
(fan cooled motor)
2: Inverter motor protection
(externally cooled motor)
3: Vector motor protection
When the Inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this parameter is set to 1, protection may not be effective.
Motor protection time constant
MOL Time
Const
Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload capability is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started.
Setting
Range
0 to 3
0.1 to
5.0
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1
1.0 min
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
A
Q
A
Q
A
480H
481H
Power Loss Settings: L2
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
Page
L2-05
Undervoltage detection level
PUV Det Level
Sets the DC bus undervoltage
(UV) detection level (DC bus voltage).
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
150 to
210
*1
190VDC
*1
No A A A 489H --
L2-11
Battery Voltage
Volt@batterydr
Sets the battery voltage.
0 to 400 0VDC
* 1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. The value for a 400 V class Inverter is the double.
No A A A 4CBH
User Parameter Tables
Stall Prevention: L3
Parameter Number
L3-01
L3-02
L3-05
L3-06
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Stall prevention selection during accel
StallP Accel Sel
0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.
With a too heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped when L3-02 level is exceeded.
Acceleration starts again when the current has fallen below the stall prevention level).
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a basis, acceleration is automatically adjusted. The set acceleration time is disreg-arded.)
0 to 2 1
Stall prevention level during accel
StallP Accel Lvl
Sets the stall prevention during acceleration operation current level as a percentage of Inverter rated current.
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or 2.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary. Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.
0 to 200 150%
Stall prevention selection during running
StallP Run Sel
Selects the stall prevention during running.
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1: Deceleration using deceleration time 1
(C1-02.)
2: Deceleration using deceleration time 2 (C1-04.)
0 to 2 1
Stall prevention level during running
StallP Run Level
Set the stall prevention during running operation current level as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.
30 to 200 150%
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
48FH
490H
493H
494H
Page
4
4-
31
4
-32
Reference Detection: L4
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
L4-01
L4-02
Speed agreement detection level
Spd Agree Level
Speed agreement detection width
Spd Agree Width
Effective when "f out
/f set
agree 1",
"Frequency detection 1" or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function output.
Effective when "f ref
/f out
agree 1",
"f out
/f set
agree 1" or "Frequency detection 1" or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function output.
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
20.0
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
L4-03
Speed agreement detection level (+/-)
Spd Agree Lvl+-
Effective when "f out
/f set
agree 2",
"Frequency detection 3" or "Frequency detection 4" is set for a multi-function output.
-120.0 to
+120.0
0.0 Hz
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
499H
49AH
49BH
L4-04
Speed agreement detection width (+/-)
Spd Agree Wdth+-
Effective when "f ref
/f out
agree 2"
"f out
/f set
agree 2", "Frequency detection 3" or "Frequency detection 4" is set for a multi-function output.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz No A A A 49CH
Fault Restart: L5
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Number of auto restart attempts
L5-01
L5-02
Num of Restarts
Auto restart operation selection
Restart Sel
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Sets the number of auto restart attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault The retry fault code are the followings
OV, UV1, GF, OC, OL2, OL3,
OL4, UL3, UL4, PF, LF, SE1,
SE2, SE3
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.
0: No output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
0 to 10
0 or 1
2
1
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
49EH
49FH
Page
User Parameter Tables
Torque Detection: L6
Parameter Number
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Torque detection selection 1
Torq Det 1 Sel
0: Torque detection disabled.
1: Car stuck detection only with speed agreement; operation continues (warning is output).
2: Car stuck detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
3: Car stuck detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection.
4: Car stuck detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection.
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues (warning is output).
6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection.
8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection.
0 to 8 4
Torque detection level 1
Torq Det 1 Lvl
Vector control: Motor rated torque is set as 100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
0 to 300 150%
Torque detection time 1
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time.
Torq Det 1 Time
Torque detection selection 2
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 8
0.1 s
0
Torq Det 2 Sel
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4A1H
4A2H
4A3H
4A4H
Page
L6-05
Torque detection level 2
See L6-01 to L6-03 for a description.
Torq Det 2 Lvl
L6-06
Torque detection time 2
Torq Det 2 Time
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
150%
0.1 s
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
4A5H
4A6H
4
4-
33
4
-34
Torque Limits: L7
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
L7-06
L7-07
Forward drive torque limit
Torq Limit Fwd
Reverse drive torque limit
Torq Limit Rev
Forward regenerative torque limit
Torq Lmt Fwd
Rgn
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Torq Lmt Rev
Rgn
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Revers e
Output torque
Positive torque
Regenerative state
Regenerative state
Negative
No. of motor rotations
Forward
Torque limit time constant
Torque Limit
Time
Sets the torque limit integration time constant
Torque Limit
Operation during accel/decel
Torque Limit Sel
Sets the torque limit operation during acceleration and deceleration.
0: P-control (I control is added at constant speed operation)
1: I-control
Normally changing this setting is not necessary.
If the torque limitation accuracy during accel/decel. has preference, I control should be selected. This may result in an increased accel./decel. time and speed deviations from the reference value.
0 to
300
0 to
300
0 to
300
0 to
300
5 to
10000
0 or 1
300%*
300%*
300%*
300%*
200 ms
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
4A7H
4A8H
4A9H
4AAH
4ACH
4C9H
Page
Hardware Protection: L8
Parameter Number
L8-02
L8-03
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Overheat pre-alarm level
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm in
°C.
The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
50 to 130 90
°C*
Operation selection after overheat prealarm
OH Pre-Alarm Sel
Sets the operation when an
Inverter overheat pre-alarm occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.
0 to 3 3
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AEH
4AFH
Page
User Parameter Tables
Parameter Number
L8-05
L8-07
L8-09
L8-10
L8-11
L8-12
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Input open-phase protection selection
Ph Loss In Sel
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects power supply open-phase, power supply voltage imbalance or
DC bus electrostatic capacitor deterioration.)
Output open-phase protection selection
Ph Loss Out Sel
0: Disabled
1: Enabled, 1 Phase
Observatioin
2: Enabled, 2 and 3 Phase
Observatioin
An output open-phase is detected at less than 5% of
Inverter rated current.
When the applied motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, the detection may not work properly and should be disabled.
Ground fault detection selection
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
Ground Fault Sel
Cooling fan control selection
Fan On/Off Sel
Set the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan.
0: ON when Inverter is running only
1: ON whenever power is ON
2: When the temperature exceeds L8-21 setting.
0 or 1
0 or 2
0 or 1
0 or 2
0
2
1
0
Cooling fan control delay time
Fan Delay Time
Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the inverter STOP command is given. (Valid only if L8-10 = 0)
0 to 300 60 s
Ambient temperature
Ambient Temp
Sets the ambient temperature.
45 to 60 45
°C
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4B1H
4B3H
4B5H
4B6H
4B7H
4B8H
L8-18
Soft CLA selection
Soft CLA Sel
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1 1 No A A A 4BFH --
L8-20
Output phase loss detection time Sets the detection time of outout phase loss detection (LF.)
Pha loss det T
0.0 to
2.0
0.2sec
No A A A 4C0H
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
4
4-
35
4
-36
N: Special Adjustments
Automatic Frequency Regulator: N2
Parameter Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
N2-01
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
AFR Gain
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
If necessary, adjust this parameter as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase the set value.
• If response is low, decrease the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time, while checking the response.
0.00 to
10.00
N2-02
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant
AFR Time
Set the time constant 1 to decide the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control.
1.00
0 to 2000 50 ms
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
No
No
A
A
No
No
584H
585H
User Parameter Tables
Feed Forward: N5
User constants for the feed forward control are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMO
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
BUS
Register
Page
N5-01
N5-02
Feed forward control selection
Feedfoward Sel
Motor acceleration time
Motor Accel Time
Enables or disables the feed forward control.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Set the time required to accelerate the motor at the rated torque
(T
100
) to the rated speed (Nr).
J: GO
2
/4, P: Motor rated output t a
=
2
⋅ [
⋅
2
100
[
Nm
[
] rpm
]
However,
T
100
= ------
2
π
⋅
N
P kW r
[ rpm
]
]
⋅
3
[
Nm
]
0 or 1
0.001 to
10.000
1
0.178 s
*
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B0H
5B1H
N5-03
Feed forward proportional gain
Feedfoward Gain
Sets the proportional gain for feed forward control.
Speed reference response will increase as the setting of
N5-03 is increased.
* The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity
0.00 to
100.00
1.00
No No No A 5B2H
Digital Operator/Monitor Parameters: o
Monitor Selections: o1
Parameter
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Display o1-01 o1-02
Monitor selection Set the number of the 4rd. monitor item to be displayed in the
User Monitor Sel
Drive Mode. (U1-)
(On LED operator JVOP-161 only.)
Monitor selection after power up
Power-On Monitor
Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
4 to 99
1 to 4
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
6
1
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
500H
501H
Page
4
4-
37
4
-38
Parameter
Number
Name
Description
Display o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Display
Scaling
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum output frequency is
100%)
2 to 39: rpm units (Set the motor poles.)
40 to 39999: User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.
Setting
Range
0 to
39999
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 No A A A 502H
Sets the value that is to be displayed at
100% excluding the decimal point.
Sets the number of decimal places.
o1-04 o1-05
LCD Contrast
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/f characteristics
Display Units
Set the setting unit for frequency reference-related parameters.
0: Hz
1: min
−1
LCD Display contrast adjustment
Sets the contrast on the optional
LCD operator
(JVOP-160).
1: light
2:
3: normal
4:
5: dark
0 or 1
0 to 5
0
3
No
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
A
503H
504H
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions: o2
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display o2-01 o2-02
LOCAL/REMOTE
Enables/Disables the Digital key enable/disable
Operator/Monitor Local/Remote key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between
Local/Remote Key the Digital Operator/Monitor and the parameter settings b1-01, b1-02.)
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
Oper Stop Key
Enables/Disables the Stop key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the run command is issued from an external terminal, the Stop key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)
Setting
Range
0 or 1
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
0
0
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
505H
506H
Page
User Parameter Tables
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page o2-03
User parameter initial value
User Defaults
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set parameters as user initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)
When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
0 to 2 0 No A A A 507H
o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 kVA selection
Inverter Model #
Frequency reference setting method selection
Operator M.O.P.
Do not set unless after replacing the control board. (Refer to
When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator/Monitor frequency reference monitor, sets whether the Enter key is necessary or not.
0: Enter key needed
1: Enter key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without
Enter key operation.
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
Oper
Detection
Sets the operation when the Digital Operator/Monitor is disconnected.
0: Operation continues even if the Digital Operator/Monitor is disconnected.
1: OPR is detected at Digital
Operator/Monitor disconnection. Inverter output is switched off, and the fault contact is operated.
Cumulative operation time setting
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Elapsed Time Set
Cumulative operation time selection
Elapsed Time Run
0: Accumulated inverter power on time.
1: Accumulated inverter run time.
0 to FF
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to
65535
0 or 1 o2-09
Initialize Mode
InitModeSet
2: Europe 2 o2-10 o2-12 o2-15
Fan operation time setting
Fan ON Time Set
Sets the initial value of the fan operation time.
The operation time is accumulated starting from this set value.
Fault trace initialize
Fault Trace Init
Number of Travels counter initialize
Initialize Sel
0: No initialisation
1: Initialize (= zero clear) after setting ”1“ o2-12 will be returned to ”0“
Operation counter initilalization
0: Number of travels counter is
kept
1: Number of travels counter
monitor clear
0 to
65535
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
0
0
0 hr
1
2
0 hr
0
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
508H
509H
50AH
50BH
50CH
50DH
50EH
510H
513H
-
4
4-
39
4
-40
Copy Function: o3
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display o3-01 o3-02
Copy function selection
Copy Function Sel
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
Read permission selection 0: READ prohibited
Read
Allowable
1: READ permitted
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to 3 0 No A A A 515H
0 or 1 0 No A A A 516H
Lift Function Parameters: S
S1 Brake Sequence
Parameter
Number
Name
Description
Display
S1-02
S1-03
DC injection braking current at start
DC Inj I @start
DC injection braking currnet at stop
DC Inj I @stop
DC injection braking time at start
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
S1-04
S1-05
S1-06
S1-07
DC Inj T@start
DC injection braking time at stop
DC Inj T@stop
Brake release delay time
Brake open delay
Brake close delay time
Brake CloseDelay
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start in units of
1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When the set value is 0,
DC injection braking at start is not performed.
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of
1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after the stop command is input. When the set value is 0.00, DC injection braking at stop is not performed.
Sets the time delay from the brake open command to the start of acceleration.
This timer can be used to avoid running against the closed brake at start.
Sets the time delay from the internal brake close command until the brake control output is switched.
This timer can be used to avoid closing the brake when the motor is still turning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to
100
0 to
100
0.00
to
10.00
0.00
to
10.00
0.00
to
10.00
0.00
to
S1-05
50%
50%
0.30 s
0.60 s
0.20
0.10
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
681H
682H
18BH
18CH
685H
685H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Display
S1-14
S1-15
S1-16
SE2 detection delay time
SE2 det T
Used to set the delay time for the detectio of a SE2 fault.
At the time S1-06 + S1-14 after the
Fwd/Rev command was given the output current is measured. If it is below 25% of the no-load current
(E2-03) setting a SE2 fault will be output.
0 to
S1-04 -
S1-06
SE3 detection delay time
SE3 det T
Used to set the delay time for the detection of a SE3 fault.
At the time S1-15 after the fwd/rev command was given, the inverterstarts to observe the output current continously. If it falls below 25% of the no-load current (E2-03) setting a SE3 will be output.
RUN delay time
Run Delay T
Sets the delay time from the Run signal input to the internal run enable.
0 to
5000
0.00
to
1.00
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
200ms
200ms
0.10sec
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6A1H
6A2H
6A3H
S1-17
S1-18
S1-19
S1-20
S1-21
S1-22
DC injection current gain at regenerative operation
DC Inj gain@gen
DC injection current gain at motoring operation
DC Inj gain@mot
Used to set the DC injection gain when inveter is in the regerenative mode.
Used to set the DC injection gain when inveter is in the motoring mode.
0 to
400
0 to
400
Output contactor open delay time
Cont open delay
Sets the contactor control output delay time after stop.
0.00
to
1.00
Zero-servo gain Adjust the strength of the zeroservo lock.
When Closed Loop Vector control is selected, a position control loop
Zero Servo Gain is created at stop. Increasing the zero-servo gain increases the strength of the lock. Increasing it by too much will cause oscillation.
0 to 100
Zero-servo completion width
Zero Servo
Count
Sets the bandwidth of the Zero
Servo completion output.
Enabled when the “zero-servo completion (end)” is set for a multi-function output. The zeroservo completion signal is ON when the current position is within the range (the zero-servo position
+ zero-servo completion width.)
Set S1-21 to 4 times of the allowable displacement pulse amount at the PG.
Starting torque compensation increase time
Torque incr T
Sets the increase time for the analog input torque compensation signal. Sets the time the torque reference needs to reach 300% torque reference.
0 to
16383
0 to
5000
100%
20%
0.10sec
5
10
500ms
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
6A4H
6A5H
6A6H
6A7H
6A8H
6A9H
4
4-
41
4
-42
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
S1-23
S1-24
S1-25
S1-26
S1-27
Torque compensation gain during lowering
TorqCompgain@low
Sets the torque compensation gain at lowering when the torque compensation at start function is used.
0.500
to
10.000
Torque compensation bias during raising
TorqComp-
Bias@ri
Sets the torque compensation bias at raising when the torque compensation at start function is used.
Torque compensation bias during lowering
TorqComp-
Bias@red
Sets the torque compensation bias at lowering when the torque compensation at start function is used.
Dwell speed reference
DWELL speed
-200.0
to
+200.0
-200.0
to
+200.0
Hold speed reference when the load is heavy.The frequency reference follows the C1-07 acceleration 4 setting time.
Acceleration time will be changed when the motor speed exceeds the
C1-11 setting frequency.
0.0
to 120.0
Door zone speed level
Door Zone Level
Sets the door zone speed level.
If the motor speed (in CLV and
OLV) or the output frequency (in
V/f control) falls below S1-27 and a multifunction output is set for the “Door zone” signal
(H2-=42), this output will be closed.
0.0
to 120.0
1.000
0.0%
0.0%
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6AAH
6ABH
6ACH
6ADH
6ADH
User Parameter Tables
S2 Slip Compensation
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
S2-01
Motor rated speed
Rated rpm
Description
Sets the motor rated speed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
300 to
1800
S2-02
S2-03
S2-07
Slip compensation gain in motoring mode
SlipComp gainMot
Sets the slip compensation gain in motoring mode.
It can be used to improve the leveling accuracy.
Slip compensation gain in regenerative mode
Sets the slip compensation gain in regenerative mode.
It can be used to improve the leveling accuracy.
SlipComp gain-
Gen
Slip compensation delay time
SlipCompDelay
T
Sets the Slip compensation delay time.
0.0
to
2.5
0.0
to
2.5
0 to
10000
1380 rpm
0.7
1.0
200ms
No
Yes
Yes
No
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
6AEH
6AFH
6B0H
6B4H
S3 Special Sequence Functions
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display
S3-01
Short-floor funciton selection
Short floor sel
Enables or disables the short floor operation function
0:disabled
1:enabled
Setting
Range
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 No A A A 6BDH
4
4-
43
4
-44
T: Motor Autotuning
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
T1-01
T1-02
T1-03
T1-04
T1-05
T1-06
T1-07
T1-08
T1-09
Autotuning mode selection
Tuning Mode Sel
Sets the autotuning mode.
0: Rotating autotuning
1: Non-rotating autotuning
2: Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Motor output power
Mtr Rated Power
Sets the output power of the motor in kilowatts.
Motor rated voltage
Rated Voltage
Motor rated current
Rated
Current
Sets the rated voltage of the motor.
Sets the rated current of the motor.
Motor base frequency
Rated Frequency
Sets the base frequency of the motor.
Number of motor poles
Sets the number of motor poles.
Number of Poles
Motor base speed Sets the base speed of the motor
Rated Speed in r/min.
Number of PG pulses
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution.
PG Pulses/Rev
No load current
Sets the no load currnet of motor.
No load current
0 to 2
*1
0.00 to
650.00
0 to
255.0
*3
1.75 to
35.00
*4
0 to
120.0
2 to 48 poles
0 to
24000
0 to
24000
0.0 to
13.99
*2
1
3.70 kW
*2
190.0 V
*3
14.00 A
*2
50.0 Hz
4 poles
1450 r/min
1024
E2-03
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Yes Yes
No Yes
No
No
No Yes
No No
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
No Yes Yes
701H
702H
703H
704H
705H
706H
707H
-
708H
709H
Page
* 1. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. For V/f control a set value 2 is possible only.
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)
* 3. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 4. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
User Parameter Tables
U: Monitor Parameters
Status Monitor Parameters: U1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
U1-01
Frequency reference Monitors/sets the frequency
Frequency Ref reference value.*
U1-02
Output frequency
Output Freq
Output current
Monitors the output frequency.*
U1-03
Output Current
Monitors the output current.
Output Signal Level at
Multi-Function Analog
Output (AO-option card)
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
Min.
Unit
0.01
Hz
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
A
10 V: Inverter rated output current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value output)
0.1 A A
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A A
A
A
A
A
A
40H
41H
42H
U1-04
Control method
Control Method
Motor speed
U1-05
Motor Speed
U1-06
Output voltage
Output Voltage
U1-07
DC bus voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Output power
U1-08
Output kWatts
U1-09
Torque reference
Torque
Reference
Displays the current control method.
Monitors the detected motor speed.*
Monitors the output voltage reference value.
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to +10 V output)
Monitors the main DC bus voltage.
Monitors the output power
(internally detected value).
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
10 V: Inverter capacity
(max. applicable motor capacity)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
Monitors the internal torque reference value for open vector control.
10 V: Motor rated torque
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
-
0.01
Hz
0.1 V A
1 V
0.1 kW
A
No
A
A
0.1% No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
43H
44H
45H
46H
47H
48H
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
Input terminal status
Shows input ON/OFF status.
U1-10
Input Term Sts
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON
1: REV command
(S2) is ON
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON
(Cannot be output.) A A A 49H
4
4-
45
4
-46
Parameter Number
Name
Description
Display
U1-11
Output terminal status
Shows output ON/OFF status.
1: Multi-function contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON
Output Term Sts
1: Multi-function contact output 2
(M3-M4) is ON
1: Multi-function contact output 3
(M5-M6) is ON
Not used
(Always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/MB-MC) is
ON
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
(Cannot be output.) A A A 4AH
U1-12
Operation status Inverter operating status.
Int Ctl Sts 1
Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter ready
(Cannot be output.)
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
A A A 4BH
U1-13
Cumulative operation time
Elapsed Time
Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the operating time/power ON time selection can be set in o2-07 and o2-08.
(Cannot be output.)
U1-14
Software No.
(flash memory)
FLASH ID
U1-15
Terminal A1 input level
Term A1 Level
(Manufacturer’s ID number)
Monitors the input level of analog input A1. A value of 100% corresponds to 10V input.
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
U1-16
Terminal A2 input level
Term A2 Level
Monitors the input level of analog input A2. A value of 100% corresponds to 10V/20mA input.
U1-18
Motor secondary current (Iq)
Mot SEC Current
Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary current.
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
U1-19
Motor excitation current (Id)
Mot EXC current
Monitors the calculated value of the motor excitation current.
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
10 V/20mA: 100%
(0 to ±10 V possible)
10 V:Motor rated current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
10 V:Motor rated current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
1 hr
-
A
A
0.1% A
0.1% A
0.1% A
0.1% No
U1-20
Frequency reference after softstarter
SFS Output
Monitors the frequency reference after the soft starter.
This frequency value does not include compensations, such as slip compensation.
The unit is set in o1-03.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01H
z
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 4CH
A 4DH
A 4EH
A
A
A
A
4FH
51H
52H
53H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
U1-21
ASR Input
U1-22
ASR output
U1-25
ASR input
ASR output
DI-16H2 input status
DI-16 Reference
Monitors the input to the speed control loop.
The maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the output from the speed control loop.
The maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V:Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
Monitors the reference value from a DI-16H2 Digital Reference
Card.
The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on user constant F3-01.
(Cannot be output.)
U1-26
Output voltage reference (Vq)
Voltage Ref(Vq)
U1-27
Output voltage reference (Vd)
Voltage Ref(Vd)
U1-28
Software No.
(CPU)
CPU ID
Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control.
Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor excitation current control.
(Manufacturer’s CPU software
No.)
10 V: 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
(Cannot be output.)
U1-32
ACR output of q axis
ACR(q)
Output
Monitors the current control output value for the motor secondary current.
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
U1-33
ACR output of d axis
ACR(d) axis
Monitors the current control output value for the motor excitation current.
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
U1-34
OPE fault parameter
Shows the first parameter number when an OPE fault is detected.
OPE Detected
(Cannot be output.)
U1-35
Zero sevo movement pulses
Zero Servo Pulse
Shows the number of PG pulses of the movement range when zero servo was activated. The shown value is the actual pulse numer times 4.
(Cannot be output.)
MEMOBUS communications error code
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used
1: Parity error
U1-39 (Cannot be output.)
1: Overrun error
Transmit Err
1: Framing error
0.01% No
0.01% No
-
0.1 V No
0.1 V No
-
0.1
%
0.1
%
-
-
-
A
A
No
No
A
No
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
54H
55H
58H
59H
5AH
5BH
5FH
60H
61H
62H
66H
1: Timeout
U1-40
Cooling fan operating time
FAN Elapsed
Time
Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan. The time can be set in
02-10.
(Cannot be output.)
1 hr
A A A 67H
4
4-
47
4
-48
Parameter Number
U1-44
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
ASR output without filter
ASR Output w Fil
Monitors the output from the speed control loop (i.e., the primary filter input value). 100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.
10 V: Rated secondary current of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
0.01% No
Control Methods MEMO-
BUS
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Register
No A 6BH
Feed forward control output
U1-45
FF Cout Output
Monitors the output from feed forward control. 100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.
10 V: Rated secondary current of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
0.01% No No A 6CH
Slip compensation value
U1-50
Slip comp value
Monitors the slip compensation value.100% is displayed for rated slip
10 V: Rated slip of motor
( -10 V to 10 V)
0.01% A A A 71H
U1-51
Max Current during acceleration
Max Amp at accel
Monitors the maximum currnet during acceleration.
10 V: Rated current of motor
(0 V to 10 V)
0.1 A A
U1-52
Max Current during deceleration
Max Amp at decel
Monitors the maximum currnet during deceleration.
10 V: Rated current of motor
(0 V to 10 V)
0.1 A A
U1-53
Max Current during Top speed
Max Amp at top speed
Monitors the maximum currnet at top speed.
10 V: Rated current of motor
(0 V to 10 V)
0.1 A A
U1-54
Max Current during leveling speed
Max Amp at Vl sped
Monitors the maximum currnet at
Vl speed.
10 V: Rated current of motor
(0 V to 10 V)
0.1 A A
U1-55
Operation counter Monitors the lift operation
Operation Cnt coumter .
O2-15 can clear this counter.
(Cannot be output.) times A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
72H
73H
74H
75H
76H
User Parameter Tables
Fault Trace: U2
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
U2-01
Current fault
Current Fault
U2-02
Last fault
Last Fault
The content of the current fault.
The error content of the last fault.
U2-03
Reference frequency at fault
The reference frequency when the last fault occurred.
Frequency Ref
U2-04
Output frequency at fault
Output Freq
U2-05
Output current at fault
Output
Current
The output frequency when the last fault occurred.
The output current when the last fault occurred.
U2-06
Motor speed at fault The motor speed when the last
Motor Speed fault occurred.
U2-07
Output voltage reference at fault
Output
Voltage
The output reference voltage when the last fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
U2-08
DC bus voltage at fault
DC Bus Voltage
The main current DC voltage when the last fault occurred.
U2-09
Output power at fault The output power when the last
Output kWatts fault occurred.
U2-10
Torque reference at fault
Torque
Reference
The reference torque when the last fault occurred. The motor rated torque corresponds to 100%.
U2-11
Input terminal status at fault
Input Term Sts
The input terminal status when the last fault occurred.
The format is the same as for U1-
10.
U2-12
Output terminal status at fault
Output Term Sts
U2-13
Operation status at fault
Inverter Status
The output terminal status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-11.
The operating status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.
U2-14
Cumulative operation time at fault
The operating time when the last fault occurred.
Elapsed Time
(Cannot be output.)
-
-
0.01
Hz
0.01
Hz
0.01
Hz
0.1 kW
1 hr
A
A
A
A
0.1 A A
No
0.1 V A
1 V A
A
0.1% No
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
80H
81H
82H
83H
84H
85H
86H
87H
88H
89H
8AH
8BH
8CH
8DH
The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
4
4-
49
4
-50
Fault History: U3
Parameter Number
Name
Display
U3-01
Last fault
Last Fault
Description
The error content of 1st last fault.
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
U3-02
Second last fault
Fault Message 2
U3-03
Third last fault
Fault Message 3
The error content of 2nd last fault.
The error content of 3rd last fault.
U3-04
Fourth last fault
Fault Message 4
The error content of 4th last fault.
U3-05
Cumulative operation time at fault The total operating time when the 1st previous fault occurred.
Elapsed Time 1
U3-06
Accumulated time of second fault
Elapsed Time 2
The total operating time when the 2nd previous fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
U3-07
Accumulated time of third fault
Elapsed Time 3
The total operating time when the 3rd previous fault occurred.
U3-08
Accumulated time of fourth/oldest fault
Elapsed Time 4
The total operating time when the 4th previous fault occurred.
Fifth last to tenth last fault
U3-09 –
U3-14
Fault Message 5 to 10
The error content of the 5th to 10th last fault
Min.
Unit
MEMOBUS
Register
-
-
-
-
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
–
90H
91H
92H
93H
94H
95H
96H
97H
Accumulated time of fifth to tenth fault
U3-15 –
U3-20
Elapsed Time 5 to 10
Total generating time when 5th ... 10th pevious fault occured
1hr
804
805H
806H
807H
808H
809H
806H
80FH
810H
811H
812H
813H
The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
User Parameter Tables
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
Parameter
Number
Name Setting Range Unit
C3-01 Slip compensation gain
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
E1-09 Min. output frequency (FMIN)
*2
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
S1-01 O speed level
S1-04 DC injection braking time at stop
*2
0.0 to 2.5
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.0 to 120.0
*4
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.0 to 10.0
0.00 to 10.00
-
0.1 V
0.1 Hz
0.1 V
0.1 Hz
0.01 sec
* 1. The settings are 0.05 (Closed Loop Vector) / 2.00 (Open Loop vector) for inverters of 55kW or larger.
* 2. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.
* 3. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
V/f Control
A1-02=0
Factory Setting
Open
Loop
Vector
A1-02=2
Closed
Loop
Vector
A1-02=3
1.0
1.0
1.0
20.0
*2*3
0.5
*2
12.5
*2*3
1.2
0.50
12.5
0.3
2.0
0.5
0.30
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.00
4
4-
51
4
-52
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 45 kW*
Para meter
Number
Unit
Factory Setting Open
Loop
Vector
Control
Closed
Loop
Vector
Control
E1-03
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0 180.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 190.0 190.0 190.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
E1-07
*
E1-08
*
Hz
V
2.5
14.0
3.0
14.0
3.0
14.0
3.0
14.0
25.0
35.0
25.0
50.0
30.0
35.0
30.0
50.0
2.5
18.0
2.5
23.0
3.0
18.0
3.0
23.0
3.0
14.0
3.0
14.0
3.0
14.0
3.0
18.6
3.0
12.5
0.0
0.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3
E1-10
*
V 7.0
1.5
7.0
1.5
7.0
1.5
7.0
1.3
6.0
1.3
7.0
1.5
6.0
1.5
7.0
1.3
9.0
1.3
11.0
1.5
9.0
1.5
13.0
1.5
7.0
1.5
7.0
1.5
7.0
0.5
9.7
0.3
2.5
0.0
0.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V Class Inverters of 55 kW
Para meter
Number
Unit
Factory Setting Open
Loop
Vector
Control
Closed
Loop
Vector
Control
E1-03
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0 180.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 190.0 190.0 190.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
E1-07
*
E1-08
*
Hz
V
2.5
12.0
3.0
12.0
3.0
12.0
3.0
12.0
25.0
35.0
25.0
50.0
30.0
35.0
30.0
50.0
2.5
15.0
2.5
20.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
20.0
3.0
12.0
3.0
12.0
3.0
12.0
3.0
16.0
3.0
12.5
0.0
0.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3
E1-10
*
V 6.0
1.5
6.0
1.5
6.0
1.5
6.0
1.3
5.0
1.3
6.0
1.5
5.0
1.5
6.0
1.3
7.0
1.3
9.0
1.5
7.0
1.5
11.0
1.5
6.0
1.5
6.0
1.5
6.0
0.5
8.3
0.3
2.5
0.0
0.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
User Parameter Tables
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
200 V Class Inverters
Parameter
Number
Name Unit
Factory Setting
o2-04
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
C6-02 Carrier frequency kW 3.7
4
3
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
A
Hz
A
W
%
W
°C
2.73
4.50
5.5
5
3
7.5
6
3
14.00
19.60
26.60
11
7
3
15
8
3
18.5
9
3
22
A
3
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
0.101
0.079
19.6
112
75
1.50
5.10
18.2
172
68
1.30
8.00
15.5
262
75
39.7
1.70
11.2
19.5
245
80
53.0
1.60
15.2
17.2
272
65
65.8
1.67
15.7
20.1
505
75
77.2
1.70
18.5
19.5
538
75
Parameter
Number
Name Unit
Factory Setting
o2-04
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
C6-02 Carrier frequency kW 30
B
2
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
A
Hz
A
W
%
W
°C
37
C
2
45
D
2
55
E
2
105.0
131.0
160.0
190.0
1.80
21.9
1.43
45.6
0.064
0.039
0.030
0.022
20.8
699
1.33
38.2
18.8
823
1.60
44.0
20.2
852
20.5
960
4
4-
53
4
-54
400 V Class Inverters
Parameter
Number
Name Unit
Factory Setting
o2-04
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
C6-02 Carrier frequency kW 3.7
4
3
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
A
Hz
A
W
%
W
°C
7.00
2.70
2.30
4.0
5
3
7.00
2.70
2.30
5.5
5
3
9.80
1.50
2.60
7.5
6
3
13.30
1.30
4.00
11
7
3
19.9
1.70
5.6
15
8
3
3.333
3.333
1.595
1.152
0.922
0.550
19.3
130
90
19.3
130
90
18.2
193
85
15.5
263
90
19.6
385
73
26.5
1.60
7.6
17.2
440
90
Parameter
Number
Name Unit
Factory Setting
o2-04
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
C6-02 Carrier frequency kW 18.5
4
3
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
A
Hz
A
W
%
W
°C
32.9
1.67
7.8
80
22
5
3
80
30
6
2
37
7
2
45
8
2
55
9
2
95.0
1.46
24.0
0.403
0.316
0.269
0.155
0.122
0.088
20.1
508
38.6
1.70
9.2
23.5
586
52.3
1.80
10.9
20.7
750
65.6
1.33
19.1
18.8
925
79.7
1.60
22.0
19.9
1125
20.0
1260
Parameter Settings by
Function
Carrier Frequency Derating and Current Limitation.5-2
Control Sequence ....................................................5-4
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ......5-17
Adjusting Analog Input Signals ..............................5-22
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation .................5-23
Improving the Operation Performance...................5-26
Protective Functions ..............................................5-34
Inverter Protection .................................................5-40
Input Terminal Functions .......................................5-43
Output Terminal Functions ....................................5-47
Motor and V/f Pattern Setup ..................................5-50
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions ........................5-57
PG Option Cards ...................................................5-65
Battery Operation...................................................5-68
Automatic Fault Restart .........................................5-71
5
5
-2
Carrier Frequency Derating and
Current Limitation
Carrier Frequency Setting
The carrier frequency selection has a direct influence on the motor noise. The higher the carrier frequency the lower is the motor noise. On the other hand the overload capability of the inverter reduces with a higher carrier frequency. Both have to be considered when the setting is changed. Read the following for details.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C6-02
Name
Carrier frequency selection
Factory
Setting
3
Change during
Operation
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
Carrier Frequency Selection
The factory setting is 8 kHz for units from 3.7 to 22 kW and 5 kHz for units from 30 to 55 kW. Usually the value has not to be changed. However, if it necessary to change it, observe the following precautions:
•
•
If speed and torque vary at low speeds: Lower the carrier frequency.
If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Lower the carrier frequency.
•
•
If leakage current from the Inverter too is large: Lower the carrier frequency.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Increase the carrier frequency.
Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Capability
The inverter overload capability depends on the carrier frequency setting. The overload capability is 150% of the inverter rated current for 30 sec. After that an inverter overload fault (OL2) is shown.
If the carrier frequency is increased, a derating for the continuous output current like shown in
must be considered. The overload capability (OL2 Level) does not change. It will be 150% of the derated current for 30 sec.
Output current (%)
100% Rated Current
3 minutes 50% ED
125%
200V Class 22kW or less
400V Class 22kW or less
100%
75%
200V Class 30 to 55kW
400V Class 30 to 55kW
Carrier frequency
0
2 5 8 10 15 (kHz)
Fig 5.30 Current Derating depending on the carrier frequency
Carrier Frequency Derating and Current Limitation
Current limitation level at low speeds
Varispeed L7 limits the output current at low frequencies. This current limitation does not change with the carrier frequency selection. The current limitation in the low frequency is as follows.
150%
140%
130%
120%
110%
200V Class 15kW
400V Class 30kW
200V Class 3.7, 18, 30kW
400V Class 18, 22kW
200V Class 5.5kW
400V Class 3.7, 5.5, 7.5, 11, 55kW
200V Class11kW
200V Class 7.5, 22 , 37, 45, 55kW
400V Class 4.0, 15, 37, 45kW
0
1.5Hz
Output
Frequency
3Hz 4.5Hz
6Hz
Fig 5.31 Low frequency current limitation
IMPORTANT
• If the torque at low frequencies is too low, check whether the current runs into the limitation explained above. If so, check the motor data settings (E2-
) and the V/f pattern (E1-
).
• If the current still runs into the limit it might be necessary to install a one size bigger inverter.
• When selecting an inverter please consider the low frequency current limit as described above and select an inverter with an appropriate current margin.
5
5-
3
Control Sequence
5
-4
Up and Down Commands
Travel start in Up or Down direction
UP and Down commands are the travel direction information.
To start in the elevator in Up or Down direction the following conditions have to be fulfilled:
•
At least one speed reference must be selected.
•
•
•
The hardware base block signal must be set (not base block condition).
When a digital input is set as contactor confirmation input, the contactor confirmation signal must be present before the travel starts.
To start to the UP direction the UP direction. To start in Down direction the Down signal must be set.
DI
Inverter ready
DI
Speed
Selection
DI
UP or Down
DI
Contactor
Control
Travel stop
The inverter can be stopped as follows:
•
The direction command (UP or Down) signal is removed.
•
The speed reference selection signal is removed.
Up / Down Command Source Selection
The input source for the Up and Down signal can be selected in parameter b1-02.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b1-02
Name
RUN command source selection
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1 No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
Up/Down Commands Using the Digital Operator (b1-02=0)
When b1-02 is set to 0 the Up/Down command must be input using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,
and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator refer to
page 3-1, Digital Monitor/ Operator and Modes
This operation can be used for test purposes only.
Up/Down Commands Using Control Circuit Terminals (b1-02=1, factory setting)
When b1-02 is set to 1 the Up/Down command is input at the control circuit terminals S1 and S2. This is the factory setting and the most common configuration.
Up/Down Commands Using Memobus Communications (b1-02=2)
When b1-02 is set to 2 the Up/Down command can be set using Memobus communications.
Up/Down Commands Using an Input Option Card (b1-02=3)
When b1-02 is set to 2 the Up/Down command can be set using an input option card, for example a field bus communications card.
Control Sequence
Speed Reference Source Selection
Speed Reference Source Selection
The speed reference source can be selected using parameter b1-01.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b1-01
Name
Frequency reference source selection
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
Input the Speed Reference from the Digital Inputs (b1-01=0)
When b1-01 is set to 0 the speed reference can be selected from preset speeds using the digital inputs of the
page 5-6, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs
for details.
Input the Speed Reference Using a Voltage Signal (b1-01=1)
When b1-01 is set to 1 and H3-15 (Input function for A1) is set to 0 (Frequency reference) the speed reference can be input by the terminal A1 as a 0 to +10V signal. If an analog option card AI-14B is installed, the A1 signal is replaced by the Channel 1 input of the AI card.
The analog reference signal can be used as well as 1st speed if multispeed operation is selected (Refer to
5-6, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs
for details)
Input the Speed Reference Using Memobus Communications (b1-01=2)
When b1-01 is set to 2 the speed reference can be input using Memobus communications.
Input the Speed Reference Using an Input Option Card (b1-01=3)
When b1-01 is set to 2 the speed reference can be input using an input option card, for example a field bus communications card.
5
5-
5
5-
6
Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs
If the digital inputs are used for speed selection, the speed selection method and the speed priority depends on the setting of parameter d1-18.
Parameter
No.
d1-18
Name
Speed Priority Selection
Factory
Setting
1
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
Multi-Step Speed Operation (Binary Input) (d1-18=0)
Maximum 8 preset speed steps can be selected using 3 binary coded digital inputs. The inverter is started using the Up/Down command. It stops when the Up/Down command is removed.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d1-01 to d1-08
Name
Multi-Step speed 1 to 8 reference value
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00 Hz Yes
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
Multi-function Digital Input Settings (H1-01 to H1-05) (Example)
Terminal
S4
S5
S6
Parameter
Number
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
Set Value
3
4
5
Multi-step speed command 1
Multi-step speed command 2
Multi-step speed command 3
Details
Speed Selection Table
The following table shows the combinations of the digital input and the according speed.
If b1-02 is set to “1”, speed 1 is input as analog reference at terminal A1 or Channel CH1 of an analog input option card AI-14B if it is installed.
If an AI-14B option card is used and the function for channel 2 and 3 is set for “Auxiliary Frequency 2”
(H3-05/09=2) and “Auxiliary Frequency 3” (H3-05/09=3) the speeds 2 and 3 are set at the CH2 and CH3 input of the option card.l
Speed
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Multi-step Speed
Command 1
Multi-step Speed
Command 2
Multi-step Speed
Command 3
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Selected Frequency
Frequency reference 1 d1-01 or A1/AI-14B CH1
Frequency reference 2 d1-02 or AI-14B CH2
Frequency reference 3 d1-03 or AI-14B CH3
Frequency reference 4 d1-04
Frequency reference 5 d1-05
Frequency reference 6 d1-06
Frequency reference 7 d1-07
Frequency reference 8 d1-08
Control Sequence
Separate Speed Selection Inputs, High Speed Has Priority (d1-18=1)
With this setting 6 different speeds can be set and selected using four digital inputs.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-17
Nominal Speed
Intermediate Speed 1
Intermediate Speed 2
Intermediate Speed 3
Releveling Speed
Leveling Speed
* This speed can be selected by a combination of two inputs
50.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
4.00 Hz
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A
A
Q
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
Digital Input
Setting (H1-01 to
H1-05)
80
A
A
A
A
A
A
81
-*
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
-*
82
83
Digital Input Factory Settings
Terminal
S3
S4
S5
S6
Parameter
Number
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
Set Value
80
84
81
83
Details
Nominal speed selection (d1-09)
Inspection speed selection (d1-14)
Intermediate speed selection (d1-10)
Leveling speed selection (d1-17)
Higher Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected (H1-=83)
If d1-18 is set to 1 and one multi-function digital input is set for the leveling speed (H1-=83) after removing the selected speed signal the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17). The selected speed must be different from leveling speed and inspection speed. The higher speed has priority over the leveling speed, i.e.
as long as a higher speed is selected the leveling signal is disregarded (see the fig. below)
The inverter stops when the leveling signal or the Up/Down signal is removed.
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Donw
Leveling speed
Selected speed
No effect
Input is set
The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.
Terminal function
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)
Releveling speed command (H1-=82)
Leveling speed command (H1-=83)
Nominal
Speed d1-09
1
Intermed.
Speed 1 d1-10
Intermed.
Speed 2 d1-11
Intermed.
Speed 3 d1-12
0 1 0
Relevel.
Speed d1-13
0
0
0
X
1
0
X
1
1
X
1
1
X
0
1
X
Leveling
Speed d1-17
0
0
0
1
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, X = no meaning
0Hz
0
0
0
0
5
5-
7
5-
8
Higher Speed Priority is Selected and a Leveling Speed Input is Not Selected (H1-K83)
When the leveling speed command is not selected for any digital input, the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17) when the selected speed signal is removed. The selected speed must be different from leveling and inspection speed.
The inverter stops when the direction signal Up/Down is removed.
When no speed selection input is enabled, leveling speed is the speed reference.
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down
Selected speed
The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.
Terminal function
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)
Releveling speed command (H1-=82)
Leveling speed command (H1-=83)
Nominal
Speed d1-09
1
0
0
N/A
Intermed.
Speed 1 d1-10
0
Intermed.
Speed 2 d1-11
1
1
0
N/A
1
1
N/A
Intermed.
Speed 3 d1-12
0
1
1
N/A
Relevel.
Speed d1-13
0
0
1
N/A
Leveling
Speed d1-17
0
0
0
N/A
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, N/A = not available
To make the inverter stop must be remove the direction signal (UP or DOWN signal).
Separate Speed Selection Inputs, Leveling Speed Has Priority (d1-18=2)
The related parameters and the digital input pre-settings are the same as for the High Speed Priority setting
(d1-18=1).
Leveling Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected (H1-=83)
If d1-18 is set to “2” and one multi-function digital input is set for the leveling speed (H1-=83) the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17) as soon as the leveling speed selection input is activated. The leveling signal has priority over the selected speed, i.e. the selected speed is disregarded. The selected speed must be different from leveling speed and inspection speed.
The inverter stops when the leveling speed command is removed.
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down
Leveling speed
Selected speed
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Leveling speed has priority
Control Sequence
The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.
Terminal function
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)
Releveling speed command (H1-=82)
Leveling speed command (H1-=83)
Nominal
Speed d1-09
1
Intermed.
Speed 1 d1-10
Intermed.
Speed 2 d1-11
Intermed.
Speed 3 d1-12
0 1 0
Relevel.
Speed d1-13
0
0
0
X
1
0
X
1
1
X
1
1
X
0
1
X
Leveling
Speed d1-17
0
0
0
1
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, X = no meaning
0Hz
0
0
0
0
Leveling Speed Priority is Selected and a Nominal Speed Input is Not Selected (H1-K80)
If d1-18 is set to “2” and no digital input is set for the nominal speed at no speed selection input the speed reference is nominal speed (d1-09). When the leveling speed signal is set, the inverter starts to decelerate to the leveling speed. The leveling speed signal has priority over all other speed signals, i.e. the intermediate speed 1 and 2 and the releveling signals are disregarded when leveling speed is selected.
The inverter can be stopped by removing the leveling speed signal or the Up/Down command.
CAUTION: When the speed selection wires are broken, the nominal speed will be selected instead of stop.
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down
Leveling speed
The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.
Terminal function
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)
Releveling speed command (H1-=82)
Leveling speed command (H1-=83)
Nominal
Speed d1-09
N/A
0
0
0
Intermed.
Speed 1 d1-10
N/A
1
0
0
Intermed.
Speed 2 d1-11
N/A
Intermed.
Speed 3 d1-12
N/A
1
1
0
Relevel.
Speed d1-13
N/A
0
1
0
Leveling
Speed d1-17
N/A
X
X
1
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, N/A = not available, X = no meaning
The intermediate speed 2 can not be selected using this configuration.
5
5-
9
5-
10
Emergency Stop
If a digital input terminal (H1-) is set to 15 or 17 (emergency stop), this input can be used to fast stop the inverter in the case of emergency. In this case the emergency stop deceleration time set in C1-09 is used. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Parameter
No.
C1-09 Emergency stop time
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1.50 s No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
15
17
Emergency Stop, NO contact
Emergency Stop, NC contact
Function
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Inspection RUN
A digital input can be used to activate the inspection run. Therefore a inspection speed must be set and one digital input must be set for “Inspection Run Selection” (H1-=84).
Related parameters
Parameter
No.
d1-14 Inspection Speed
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
25.00 Hz No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
84 Inspection Run Selection
Function
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Control Sequence
The inspection run command must be set before setting the Up/Down signal. During start of the inspection
RUN the normal brake sequence is used and the inverter accelerates to the inspection speed (d1-14).
To stop the inverter, the Inspection Run command or the Up/Down command must be removed. In this case:
•
The inverter output is cut by baseblock immediately
•
•
The brake open signal is removed immediately
The contactor control output is removed immediately
The falling edge of the inspection RUN command or UP/DOWN commands triggers the contactor open command, the motor brake close command and the base block.
Inspection RUN
(Stop with Up/Down signal remove)
Inspection RUN
(Stop with Inspection Run signal remove)
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down (D/I)
Inspection RUN
Base block
MC closed (D/O)
Brake opened (D/O)
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down (D/I)
Inspection RUN
Base block
MC closed (D/O)
Brake opened (D/O) 5
Brake Sequence
The L7 supports two types of brake sequences, one with torque compensation at start using an analog input value and one without torque compensation at start.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
S1-17
S1-18
S1-19
S1-20
S1-21
S1-22
S1-23
S1-24
S1-25
H3-15
S1-02
S1-03
S1-04
S1-05
S1-06
S1-07
S1-16
Name
Terminal A1 function selection
DC injection braking current at start
DC injection braking current at sop
DC injection braking time at start
DC injection braking time at stop
Brake open delay time
Brake close delay time
Run delay time
DC injection current gain at regeneration
DC injection current gain at motoring
Output contactor open delay time
Zero-servo gain
Zero-servo completion width
Starting torque compensation increase time
Torque compensation gain in Down direction
Torque compensation bias in Up direction
Torque compensation bias in Down direction
Factory setting
100%
20%
0.10 sec
5
10
500 ms
1.0
0.0%
0.0%
0
50%
50%
0.30 sec
0.60 sec
0.20 sec
0.10 sec
0.10 sec
Change during operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
No
No
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
V/f
Control Method
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No No A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
5-
11
5-
12
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value Function
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
80 to 83 Speed selection inputs (refer to
page 5-6, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs
Yes Yes Yes
86 Contactor closed answer back signal Yes Yes Yes
Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set Value
40
41
Brake release command
Output contactor close command
Function
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Brake Sequence without torque compensation at start
To use the brake sequence without torque compensation at start,
•
•
the Terminal A1 function must be set to 0 (H3-15 = 0, speed reference input) the AI-14B Ch2 and Ch3 input functions must be set other than 14.(H3-05/09
≠ 14, torque reference not selected)
The figure below shows the timing chart for this brake sequence.
S1-16
DCInjection zero servo
S1-04
DCInjection zero servo
S1-05
Selected Speed
S1-06
Leveling
Speed
S1-07
Speed
S1-19
Up/Donw D/I
Inverter Hardware BB (D/I)
Contactor confirmation D/I
Leveling sped selection D/I
Selected speed (D/I)
Contactor Control D/O
Internal Run
Brake Control (D/O) stop t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8
Fig 5.32 Timing chart of Brake sequence without torque compensation at start t9 t10
Control Sequence
The timing chart above is divided in time zones. The following table explains the sequence in each time zone.
Timing t0-t1 t1-t2 t2-t3 t3-t4 t4-t5 t5-t6 t6-t7 t7-t8 t8-t9 t9-t10
Description
The inverter gets the direction signal (UP/DOWN)
The inverter gets the hardware base block disable signal (Not BB condition).
The inverter receives the speed reference signal.
The inverter sets the contactor closed signal.
The inverter waits for the contactor confirmation signal. If no digital input is set for “Contactor conformation signal”, the sequence is proceeded after exceeding the operation start delay time (S1-16).
Inverter will activate the output after passing the “RUN Delay Time” (S1-16).
DC Injection/zero servo or zero speed operation is started.
After passing the “Brake Open delay time” (S1-06), the inverter starts opening the brake.
The inverter keeps DC injection/zero servo or zero speed operation until
* the time S1-04 – S1-06 has exceeded if S1-06 < S1-04
* the time S1-06 has exceeded if S1-06 > S1-04 (try avoid this setting since the inverter could run against the brake)
The inverter starts to accelerate.
The inverter speed reaches the selected speed.
The speed is selection is changed to the leveling speed, the inverter starts to decelerate.
After reaching the leveling speed the inverter keeps operating at this speed.
The leveling signal is removed, the inverter ramps to stop.
The inverter reaches the zero speed.
The inverter starts DC injection/zero servo for the time set in S1-05.
After passing “Brake Close Delay Time” (S1-07), the inverter activates the brake close command.
The inverter continues DC Injection/zero speed or zero speed operation until S1-06 – S1-07 has time passed. Remove the direction signal.
The inverter shuts down the output voltage and the hardware base block signal must be set.
After the “Output contactor open delay time“(S1-19) has passed, the inverter releases the output contactor control signal.
5
5-
13
5-
14
Brake Sequence with torque compensation at start
This sequence works in Closed Loop Vector control only. To use the brake sequence with torque compensation at start,
•
the A1 function must be selected for “Torque compensation” (H3-15=1) or
•
one of the input channels Ch2 or Ch3 of the optional analog input card AI-14B must be set to “Torque
Compensation” (H3-05,H3-09=14).
The figure below shows the timing chart for this brake sequence.
Zero Speed
Control
S1-04
Zero Speed
Control
S1-05
S1-16 vn vl
S1-19 speed torque comp level at start
300%torque
S1-07
Clear the torque comp
Torque comp increase time
S1-22
Up/Donw D/I
Inverter Hardware BB (D/I)
Contactor confirmation D/I
Leveling speed selection D/I
Selected speed (D/I)
Contactor Control D/O
Internal Run
Brake Control (D/O) stop t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8
Fig 5.33 Timing chart of Brake sequence with torque compensation at start t9 t10
The timing chart above is divided in time zones. The following table explains the sequence in each time zone
Timing t0-t1 t1-t2 t2-t3 t3-t4 t4-t5 t5-t6 t6-t7 t7-t8
Description
The inverter gets the direction signal (UP/DOWN)
The inverter gets the hardware base block signal disable signal (Not BB condition).
The inverter receives the speed reference signal.
The inverter sets the contactor closed signal.
The inverter waits for the contactor confirmation signal. If no digital input is set for “Contactor conformation signal”, the sequence is proceeded after exceeding the operation start delay time (S1-16).
The Inverter will activate the output.
The DC Injection/zero servo or zero speed operation is started.
The analog torque compensation value is latched and start producing the torque compensation value from Zero based on the S1-22 (“Starting torque compensation increase time”.
After reaching torque comp level at start, the inverter sets the brake open and holds the torque compensation value until stop.
After passing zero speed operation time set in S1-04, the inverter starts accelerating.
The Dwell at start function can be activated.
The inverter starts to accelerate.
The inverter speed reaches the selected speed.
When the leveling speed is selected, the inverter starts to decelerate.
The inverter keeps operating at the leveling speed.
The leveling signal is removed, the inverter ramps to stop.
The inverter reaches the zero speed.
The inverter keeps zero speed control.
After passing “Brake Close Delay Time(S1-07)”, the inverter sets the brake close.
Control Sequence
Timing t8-t9 t9-t10
Description
The inverter continues zero speed operation until the time S1-06 – S1-07 time be passed.
Remove the direction signal.
The inverter shuts down the output voltage and the hardware base block signal must be set.
After the “Output contactor open delay time” (S1-19), the inverter releases the output contactor control signal.
Torque compensation at start
If a load measuring device is installed in the elevator, in Closed Loop Vector mode an analog input can be used to give a torque compensation value to the inverter.
The adjusted torque compensation value is latched when the direction command is given. At start it is increased from zero to the latched value using the torque increase time set in parameter S1-22. The torque compensation value is kept during the whole ride and is cleared when the direction command is removed.
The torque compensation function can be adjusted using the parameters shown in the block diagram below.
Adjust the parameter so that the torque compensation value is zero when the elevator is balanced.
%
Torque compensation bias during raising
S1-24 terminal A1
H3-15=1
H3-16
+ +
UP direction torque compensation
Torque compensation
H3-17
0 10v
S1-23
+
Torque compensation gain during lowering
S1-25
+
DOWN direction
Torque compensation bias during lowering
5
5-
15
5-
16
Short Floor Operation
Related parameters
Parameter
No.
S3-01 Short floor operation
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
Principle
The short floor operation is activated when the leveling signal is set before the nominal speed was reached.
The inverter calculates the distance for deceleration from nominal speed to 0.4 x the nominal speed, which is equal to the area S in the figure below.
Speed speed
S eed x 0.4
speed t
0
There are two ways:
•
If the leveling speed is set when 40% of the nominal speed was reached already, the inverter keeps the reached speed until the distance equal to area S is reached. After that it decelerates to leveling speed.
•
If the leveling signal is set before 40% of the nominal speed was reached, the inverter accelerates to 40% of the nominal speed and keeps it until the distance is equal to area S is reached. After that it decelerates to leveling speed.
Speed
0% Nominal speed
0
S
t
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
The acceleration time indicates the time to increase the speed from 0% to 100% of the maximum speed set in
E1-04. The deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the speed from 100% to 0% of E1-04.
Four separate acceleration and deceleration times can be set. It can be switched over between them
•
using digital input signals
•
using the automatic accel./decel. time switch over function with a changeable switching speed level
The display unit and the setting range for the times can be selected between 0.0 sec. or 0.00sec.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-10
C1-11
S1-26
Name
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
Acceleration time 3
Deceleration time 3
Acceleration time 4
Deceleration time 4
Acceleration/deceleration time setting unit
Deceleration time switching frequency
Dwell at start speed reference
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
7 Acceleration/Deceleration switch over 1
1A Acceleration/Deceleration switch over 2
Function
Factory
Setting
1.5 sec
1
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
Change during
Operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
Q
A
Q
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. The factory setting is 1.
Set value
0
1
Details
The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 6000.0 in units of 0.01 s.
The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.1 s.
5
5-
17
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
When two digital input terminals are set for “Accel./Decel. time switch over 1 and 2” (H1-=7 and 1A), the acceleration/deceleration times can be switched over even during operation by combining the ON/OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration
Time Selection 1 Terminal
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Acceleration/Deceleration
Time Selection 2 Terminal
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Acceleration Time
C1-01
C1-03
C1-05
C1-07
Deceleration Time
C1-02
C1-04
C1-06
C1-08
Automatic Deceleration Time Switch Over Using a Speed Level
The deceleration times C1-02 and C1-08 can be switched over automatically at a certain speed which can be set in parameter C1-11.
shows the working principle of the function.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output
Frequency
5-
18
Decel. time
Switching Freq.
C1-11
C1-01 C1-02
When output frequency
≥ C1-11the deceleration time 1 (C1-02) is used.
When output frequency < C1-11the deceleration time 4 (C1-08) is used.
C1-08
Fig 5.34 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Dwell at Start Function
This function can be used to have a low acceleration at start. The parameter S1-26 must be set to a certain speed level (dwell speed) to activate the function.
When the inverter starts, the inverter accelerates to the S1-26 speed level using the acceleration time C1-07.
Once the motor speed exceeds the S1-26, the inverter will use the original acceleration time.
Internal RUN
C1-07
S1-26
Soft Starter
Motor speed
Brake release
Fig 5.35 Dwell at start function
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Acceleration and S-curve Settings
Five different S-curve times are used to reduce the jerk when the speed changes.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
C2-05
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
S-curve characteristic time below leveling
shows the influence of the different S-curve times.
Factory
Setting
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
C2-02
C2-03
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
C2-04
C2-05
C2-01
Leveling Speed
Fig 5.36 S-curve settings
5
5-
19
5-
20
Output Speed Hold (Dwell Function)
The dwell function holds the speed temporarily.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell time at start
Dwell frequency at stop
Dwell time at stop
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Applying an Output Speed Dwell
The dwell function at start is applied when the speed level set in parameter b6-01 is reached and is kept for the time set in parameter b6-02. The dwell function at stop is applied when the speed reaches the level set in parameter b6-03 and is kept for the time set in parameter b6-04. The setting is shown in
Run command
Output frequency
ON
OFF b6-01 b6-03
Time b6-02 b6-04
Fig 5.37 Output Frequency Dwell Settings
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Stall Prevention During Acceleration
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if the load is too heavy.
If L3-01 is set to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current reaches 85% of the set value in L3-02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, the acceleration will stop.
If L3-01 is set to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor accelerates so that the current is held at the level set in
L3-02. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L3-01
L3-02
Name
Stall prevention selection during acceleration
Stall prevention level during acceleration
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1
150%*
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A No
A A No
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during acceleration
L3-02
85% of L3-02
5
Time
Output frequency
*1.
*2.
* 1. The acceleration rate is lowered.
* 2. The acceleration is stopped to reduce the output current.
Fig 5.38 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Time
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily. An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter lifetime. Also do not disable the function.
If the motor stalls with the factory settings check the V/f pattern settings (E1-) and the motor setup
(E2-).
If the stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running, consider to use a one size bigger inverter.
5-
21
5
-22
Adjusting Analog Input Signals
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Using the H3- parameters, the analog input values of terminal A1 or the Channels 1 to 3 of the optional analog input card AI-14B can be adjusted.
Related Parameters
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
H3-15
H3-16
H3-17
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
H3-05
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
Parameter
No.
Name
Frequency reference AI-14B CH1signal level selection
Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input gain
Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input bias
AI-14B CH3 signal level selection
AI-14B CH3 function selection
AI-14B CH3 input gain
AI-14B CH3 input bias
AI-14B CH2 signal level selection
AI-14B CH2 function selection
AI-14B CH2 input gain
AI-14B CH2 input bias
Analog input filter time constant for the AI-14B
Terminal A1 function selection
Terminal A1 input gain
Terminal A1 input bias
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
100.0%
0.0%
0.03 s
0
100.0%
0.0%
0
100.0%
0.0%
0
2
100.0%
0.0%
3
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Adjusting Analog Input Signals
The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage. The voltage level at terminal A1 is 0 to +10V. The analog input channels of the AI-14B option card can be used with 0 to
+10V or -10 to +10V.
The input signal levels can be selected using,
•
H3-01 for AI-14B CH1
•
•
H3-04 for AI-14B CH3
H3-08 for AI-14B CH2
The signals can be adjustments to the signals can be made using:
•
H3-02 (Gain) and H3-03 (Bias) for Channel 1 of the AI-14B option card
•
•
•
H3-06 (Gain) and H3-07 (Bias) for Channel 3 of the AI-14B option card
H3-10 (Gain) and H3-11 (Bias) for Channel 2 of the AI-14B option card
H3-16 (Gain) and H3-17 (Bias) for analog input A1
The gain sets the level of the selected input value if 10V are input, the bias sets the level of the selected input value if 0V is input.
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation
Speed Agreement Function
There are eight different types of frequency detection methods available. The digital outputs M1 to M6 can be programmed for this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to any external equipment.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
Name
Speed agreement detection level
Speed agreement detection width
Speed agreement detection level (±)
Speed agreement detection width (±)
Factory
Setting
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-03 (M1 – M6 function selection)
The table below shows the necessary H2-01 to H2-03 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement functions. Refer to the timing charts on the following page for details.
Function Setting
2 f ref
/f out
Agree 1 f out
/f set
Agree 1
Frequency detection 1
Frequency detection 2 f ref
/f out
Agree 2 f out
/f set
Agree 2
Frequency detection 3
Frequency detection 4
14
15
16
3
4
5
13
Setting Precautions
•
•
With L4-01 an absolute speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected in both directions
(Up and Down).
With L4-03 a signed speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected only in the set direction (positive level
→ Up direction, negative level → Down direction).
5
5-
23
5-
24
Time Charts
The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions.
Related parameter f ref
/f out
Agree 1
L4-01: Speed Agree Level
L4-02: Speed Agree Width f ref
/f out
Agree 2
L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/–
L4-04: Speed Agree Width f ref
/f out
Agree
Frequency reference
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-02
Frequency reference
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-04 f out
/f set
Agree
L4-02 f ref
/f out
Agree 1
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2) f out
/f set
Agree 1
(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
OFF f out
/f set
Agree 1
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 3)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
(L4-01 > | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-04 f ref
/f out
Agree 2
OF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 13) f out
/f set
Agree 2
(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-04
L4-03
Output frequency or motor speed
OFF ON f out
/f set
Agree 2
(Multi-function output setting = 14)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3
(L4-03 > Output frequency)
L4-04
L4-01 L4-03
Output frequency or motor speed
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 1
ON
OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 4)
Frequency
Detection
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
(L4-01 < | Output frequency |)
Freq. Detection 3
ON
OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 15)
Frequency Detection 4
(L4-03 < Output frequency)
L4-02
L4-04
L4-01
L4-03
Output frequency or motor speed
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 2
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 5)
Freq. Detection 4
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 16)
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation
Limiting the Elevator Speed
To use the high speed limit of UP direction or DOWN direction, one of the digital inputs must be set for “High speed limit switch Up” or “Down” (H1- = 87/88).
Multifunction Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
87
88
Function
High speed limit switch (Up direction)
High speed limit switch (Down direction)
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
High speed limit switch Up
The high speed limit switch UP function is to limit the speed to the leveling speed when the UP direction signal is given. The DOWN direction has no speed limit.
High speed limit switch Down
The high speed limit switch DOWN function is to limit the speed to the leveling speed when the DOWN direction signal is given, the UP direction has no speed limit.
5
5-
25
5
-26
Improving the Operation Performance
Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)
When the load is large, the motor slip also grows and the motor speed decreases. The slip compensation function keeps the motor speed constant, regardless of changes in load. When the motor is operating at the rated load, parameter E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip)
× the slip compensation gain value in parameter C3-01 is added to the output frequency. The function can be used in V/f control or Open Loop Vector control.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
C3-05
Name
Slip compensation gain
Slip compensation delay time
Slip compensation limit
Slip compensation during regeneration
Output voltage limit operation selection
Factory
Setting
1.0
2000 ms
200%
0
0
Change during
Operation
Yes
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A No
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
No
A
A
No
A
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01)
The set value of C3-01 depends on the control method. The factory settings are:
•
Open Loop Vector control: 1.0
•
Closed Loop Vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the slip depending on the actual torque output status using the rated slip
(E2-02) as reference.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. With Open Loop Vector control set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current). The motor rated slip can be calculated using the values on the motor nameplate and the following formula: slip (Hz) = –
120
The motor data can be set automatically using the autotuning function.
2. With V/f control set C3-01 to 1.0.
3. Apply a load and compare the speed reference and the actual motor speed during run with constant speed.
Adjust the slip compensation gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if the speed is higher than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
4. Setting C3-01 to 0.0 disables the slip compensation function.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C3-02)
The slip compensation delay time constant is set in ms. The setting value of C3-02 is 2000ms. Normally, there is no need to change these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
Improving the Operation Performance
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit (C3-03)
Using parameter C3-03 the upper limit for the slip compensation can be set as a percentage, taking the motor rated slip as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even after adjusting the slip compensation gain, the slip compensation limit may have been reached. Increase the limit, and check the speed again. Always make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
Slip compensation limit
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 5.39 Slip Compensation Limit
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration (C3-04)
Enables or disables the slip compensation function during regeneration. The factory setting is enabled.
Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated (C3-05)
Generally the Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage. If the output voltage reference for the motor (monitor parameter U1-06) exceeds the input voltage in the high-speed range, the output voltage becomes saturated, and inverter cannot respond to speed or load changes. This function automatically reduces the output voltage to avoid voltage saturation.
Thereby the speed control accuracy can be maintained even at high speeds (around the rated speed of the motor). By the lowered voltage the current can be around 10% higher compared to the operation without voltage limiter.
5
Torque Compensation Function Adjustments
The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load, and increases the output torque.
In V/f control the inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage using the terminal resistance value (E2-
05) and adjusts the output voltage (V) to compensate insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation.
The compensation voltage is calculated by the calculated Motor primary voltage loss
× parameter C4-01.
In Open Loop Vector control the motor excitation current and the torque producing current are calculated and controlled separately. The torque compensation affects the torque producing current only.
The torque producing current is calculated by the calculated torque reference
× C4-01.
5-
27
5-
28
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C4-01
C4-02
C4-03
C4-04
C4-05
Name
Torque compensation gain
Torque compensation delay time constant
Starting torque compensation value (forward direction)
Starting torque compensation value (reverse direction)
Starting torque compensation time constant
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1.00
2000 ms
0.0
0.0
1 ms
Yes
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A No
A
No
A
A
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01)
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
Open Loop Vector control
•
If the torque response is slow increase the setting value.
•
If vibrations occur decrease the setting value.
V/f control
•
If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
•
•
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set value.
If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Setting precautions
•
Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range.
•
Adjust the value in steps of 0.05 only.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Delay Time Constant (C4-02)
The factory setting depends on the control mode. The factory settings are:
•
V/f control: 200 ms
•
Open loop vector control: 20 ms
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
•
If the motor is vibrating or if overshooting occurs, increase the set value.
•
If the torque response is slow, decrease the set value.
Improving the Operation Performance
Starting Torque Compensation Function (C4-03 to C4-05)
A starting torque compensation can be applied to speed up the torque establishment at start in Open Loop Vector control.
It works like shown in the following diagram.
Forward (Reverse) Run command
ON
OFF
Time constant: C4-02
Time constant: C4-05
C4-03 (forward)
C4-04 (reverse, negative polarity)
Torque compensation volume
C4-05 x 4
E1-09
Output frequency
E1-09
Fig 5.40 Time Chart for Starting Torque Frequency
When this function is used, the following should be considered:
•
Both values, C4-03 and C4-04 have to be set.
•
•
•
The compensation works for motoring operation only. It can not be used for regenerative operation.
If the starting torque compensation is used and a large shock is generated at the start, increase the starting torque compensation time constant (C4-05)
The function can be not be used unrestricted for elevators, since the load is not know before the start.
5
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) (Closed Loop Vector only)
In Closed Loop Vector control the automatic speed regulator (ASR) adjusts the torque reference in order to eliminate the deviation between the speed reference and the measured speed (PG feedback).
shows the
ASR structure.
Frequency
Reference
Motor
Speed
+
-
C5-01/03/09
P
I
C5-02/04/10
C5-08
I-Limit
+
+
Delay
Timer
C5-06
Torque
Limits
Torque
Reference
Fig 5.1 ASR Structure Block Diagram
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-06
C5-08
C5-09
C5-10
Name
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
ASR integral (I) time 1
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR delay time
ASR integral limit
ASR proportional (P) gain 3
ASR integral (I) time 3
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
40.00
0.500 s
20.00
0.500 s
0.004 s
400%
40.00
0.500 s
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No No A
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
5-
29
5-
30
ASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustments
There are three sets of ASR gain and bias, one for the maximum speed (C5-01/02), one the minimum speed for acceleration (C5-03/04) and one for the minimum speed for deceleration (C5-09/10) (see the figure
ASR P,I
ASR P,I
C5-01 ASR Gain 1
C5-02 ASR I Time 1
C5-09 ASR Gain 3
C5-10 ASR I Time 3
C5-03 ASR Gain2
C5-04 ASR I time 2
C5-03 ASR Gain2
C5-04 ASR I time 2
0Hz
C5-07 E1-04
Speed(Hz)
During Acceleration
0Hz
C5-07 E1-04
Speed(Hz)
During Deceleration
below).
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gains (C5-01/03/09)
This gain adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness of the ASR is increased when this setting is increased. Oscillation will occur if this setting is increased too much.
•
•
•
Increase C5-01 if the ASR is too slow at start or very low frequencies, decrease it if vibrations occur.
Increase C5-03 if the ASR is too slow at high speed or if overshooting occurs at speed changes in the high speed area, decrease it if vibrations occur
Increase C5-09 if ASR is slow in the low speed area or if undershooting occurs at leveling speed. If vibrations occur in the low speed area during deceleration decrease the value.
Adjusting ASR Integral Times (C5-02/04/10)
This parameter sets the speed control (ASR) integral time. Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness and the speed accuracy when the load changes suddenly. Oscillation and overshooting can occur if this setting value is too low.
•
•
•
Decrease C5-02 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at start or at very low frequencies, increase it if vibrations occur.
Decrease C5-04 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at high speeds or if overshooting occurs at speed changes in the high speed area, increase it if vibrations occur.
Decrease C5-10 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow in the low speed area or if undershooting occurs at leveling speed. If vibrations occur in the low speed area during deceleration increase the value.
Improving the Operation Performance
Stabilizing Speed (Automatic Frequency Regulator) (Open Loop Vector)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function controls the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly applied or removed. It calculates the amount of speed fluctuation using the torque current (Iq) feedback value and compensates the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation. f ref f out
I q
Fig 5.41 AFR Control Loop
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
N2-01
N2-02
Name
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1.00
50 ms
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No A No
No A No
Setting the AFR Gain (N2-01)
Normally there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
If hunting occurs increase N2-01.
If the response is too low, decrease N2-01.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time while checking the response.
Inertia Compensation (Closed Loop Vector Only)
The Feed Forward Control is used to eliminate the speed overshoot or undershoot.
The function can be enabled using parameter n5-01.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
n5-01 n5-02 n5-03
Name
Feed forward control selection
Motor acceleration time
Feed forward proportional gain
Factory setting
Change during operation
0:disabled No kVA dependent
1.0
No
No
V/f
No
No
No
Open
Loop
Vector
No
No
No
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
5
5-
31
5-
32
Adjustments
Motor acceleration time (n5-02)
The motor acceleration time n5-02 the time which is needed to accelerate the to the rated speed with the rated torque of the motor. The time can be estimated like follows:
•
•
Make the general setup (V/f pattern, Motor Setup, etc.)
Balance the elevator (car in middle position, Car weight = Counter weight)
•
•
•
•
Set the torque limits to 100% using the L7- parameters.
Set the acceleration time very short (the inverter must reach the torque limit very fast).
Start in any direction and measure the time from zero speed to top speed.
Set this time in n5-02.
Feed Forward Gain (n5-03)
This value usually has not to be changed.
•
Increase the time to improve the response to the speed reference
•
Decrease the time if vibrations occur
Improving the Leveling Accuracy by Slip compensation
This function can be used in V/f and Open Loop Vector control to compensate the motor slip influence at low speed under different load conditions. Thereby the leveling accuracy can be improved.
The inverter measures the current level or torque reference 1.0 sec after speed-agree condition (acceleration finished) for 0.5 sec and calculates the average value to estimate the load. This value is used for the calculation of slip which is added to the speed reference at leveling speed (see
measure apply
Fig 5.42 Slip Compensation Working Principle
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
S2-01
S2-02
S2-03
S2-07
Name
Motor Rated rpm
Slip Compensation Gain at Motoring
Slip Compensation Gain at Regenerating
Slip Compensation primary Delay Time
Factory setting
1380rpm
0.7
1.0
200ms
Change during operation
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
No
Open
Loop
Vector
No
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
No
No
Improving the Operation Performance
Adjustments
The Slip compensation values can be set separately for motoring and regenerative operation. Before adjusting this function the general setup should have been done (Motor Setup, V/f pattern, Speeds, ASR settings etc.).
To adjust the Slip compensation function do the following in motoring and regenerative mode:
•
•
Set the motor speed in S2-01 if V/f control is used.
Try to measure the actual motor speed during leveling.
•
•
If the motor speed is lower than the leveling speed reference increase S2-02 in motoring mode or decrease
S2-03 in regenerative mode.
If the motor speed is higher than the leveling speed reference decrease S2-02 in motoring mode or increase
S2-03 in regenerative mode.
Field Forcing
The field forcing function controls the motor flux and compensates the flux establishment delay of the motor.
Thereby it improves the motor responsiveness on changes in the speed reference or the load.
Field forcing is applied during all operation conditions except DC Injection.
Using parameter d6-06 a field forcing limit can be applied. A setting of 100% is equal to the no-load current set in parameter E2-03.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d6-03 d6-06
Field forcing selection
Field forcing limit
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
400%
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No No A
No A A
5
Adjusting DC injection current level
When Open Loop Vector control mode is used, the DC injection current level at stop for motoring and regenerative operation can be adjusted individually. The motor condition (Regenerative or motoring) is detected when the inverter is running at another speed than leveling speed.
The function can be used to improve the stopping behavior.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
S1-17
S1-18
Name
DC injection current regenerative
DC injection current motoring
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
100%
20%
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No A No
No A No
5-
33
5
-34
Protective Functions
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the inverter output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation can be enabled in V/f control only. If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Enable or disable the stall prevention using parameter L3-05. Set the according deceleration times using C1-02 (Deceleration time
1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set frequency.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
L3-05
L3-06
Stall prevention selection during running function selection
Stall prevention level during running
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1
150%
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A No No
A No No
Precautions
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily. An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter lifetime. Also do not disable the function.
If the motor stalls with the factory settings check the V/f pattern (E1-) and the motor setup (E2-).
If the stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running check the mechanical system or consider to use a one size bigger inverter.
Motor Torque Detection / Car Stuck Detection
The inverter provides a torque detection function to detect overtorque (Car stuck) or undertorque. An alarm signal can be output to the digital output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, or M5-M6.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection
NO/NC) in one of the parameter H2-01 to H2-03 (digital output terminals M1 to M6 function selection).
Overtorque/undertorque is detected by:
•
observing the output current in V/f control (the inverter rated output current is equal to 100%).
•
observing the torque reference value in Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control (the motor rated torque is equal to 100%).
Protective Functions
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
Name
Torque detection selection 1
Torque detection level 1
Torque detection time 1
Torque detection selection 2
Torque detection level 2
Torque detection time 2
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
4
150%
10.0 s
0
150%
0.1 s
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
B
17
18
19
Function
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Close d Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and Operator Display (JVOP-160 only)
The relationship between alarms displayed on the digital operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Function
Operator Display
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 1
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 2
– – Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
Overtorque/Car stuck detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output).
Overtorque/Car stuck detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
Overtorque/Car stuck detection only with speed agree; output is stopped upon detection.
OL3 flashes
OL3 flashes
OL3 lights up
OL4 flashes
OL4 flashes
OL4 lights up
Overtorque/Car stuck detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection.
OL3 lights up
Undertorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output).
UL3 flashes
OL4 lights up
UL4 flashes
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues (warning is output).
UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output is stopped upon detection.
UL3 lights up UL4 lights up
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection.
UL3 lights up UL4 lights up
5
5-
35
Timing Charts
show the timing charts for overtorque and undertorque detection.
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
Overtorque detection 1 NO or overtorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
*Overtorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current
(or motor rated torque).
Fig 5.43 Overtorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
5-
36
Undertorque detection 1 NO or undertorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
*Undertorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current (or motor rated torque).
Fig 5.44 Undertorque Detection
Car Stuck Detection (OL3, Using Overtorque detection)
The Overtorque detection function can be used to detect a stuck car. The torque detection function 1 can be used for this. Therefore a digital output has to be programmed for “Overtorque detection 1” (H2- = B or
17). Using this with the factory setting car stuck is detected (output is switched) torque/current is higher than
150% for 10 sec. The level can be adjusted in L6-02, the time in L6-03. The output is switched of and an OL3
)
DC Injection/ zero servo speed
Inverter enable (D/I)
Up/Down (D/I)
Selected Speed (D/I)
Fault
Torque is higher than L6-02 detect. time
L6-03
Fig 5.45 Car Stuck fault detection
Protective Functions
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
This function allows limitation of motor shaft torque independently for each of the four quadrants. The torque limit can be set as fixed value using parameters or as variable value using an analog input. The torque limit function can be used with Open Loop Vector and Closed Loop Vector control only.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
L7-06
L7-07
Forward drive torque limit
Reverse drive torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Torque limit time constant
Torque limit operation during accel./decel.
* A setting value of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
Function
30 During torque limit
Factory Setting
Change during Operation
300%*
300%*
300%*
300%*
200 ms
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
V/f
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Setting the Torque Limit Using Parameters
Using L7-01 to L7-04, four torque limits in the following directions can be set individually: Forward drive, reverse drive, forward regenerative and reverse regenerative (see
Output Torque
L7-01
L7-04
Reverse
Regenerative
Forward
Drive
Output Speed
Reverse
Drive
Forward
Regenerative
L7-03
L7-02
Fig 5.46 Torque Limit Parameters
Using a Digital Output to Signalize Operation at the Torque Limit
If a multifunction output is set for this function (H2-01 to H2-03 is set to “30”), the output is switched ON when the motor output torque reaches one of the torque limits.
5
5-
37
5-
38
Enabling Integral Torque Limit Operation (L7-06 and L7-07)
In Open Loop Vector control an integral operation can be applied to the torque limit function (P-control is standard). This improves the torque limit responsiveness and smoothes the torque limit operation. To enable the integral operation set parameter L7-07 to 1. The integral time constant can be set in parameter L7-06.
Setting Precautions
•
•
When the output torque reaches the torque limit, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled to prevent the output torque from exceeding the torque limit. The torque limit has the priority.
The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at an output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is lower than 10 Hz, the accuracy is lowered.
Motor Overload Protection
The motor can be protected from overload using the built-in electronic thermal overload relay function.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
E2-01
L1-01
L1-02
Motor rated current
Name
Motor protection selection
Motor protection time constant
Factory
Setting
1.90 A *
1
1.0 min
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW.)
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
Q
A
Q
A
Q
A
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
1F Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level) Yes Yes Yes
Setting Motor Rated Current (E2-01)
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2-01 (for motor 1). This set value is the base current for the internal thermal overload calculation.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics (L1-01)
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the used motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities vary with the motor type. Consequently, you must select the electronic thermal protection characteristics.
Set L1-01 to:
0: to disable the thermal motor protection function.
1: to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor (self-cooled).
2: to enable the thermal motor protection for an inverter motor (externally cooled).
3: to enable the thermal motor protection for a special vector motor (externally cooled).
Protective Functions
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time (L1-02)
The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150% overload when it was running with the rated load before (i.e. operating temperature was reached before applying the 150% overload). Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02. The factory setting is 60 sec.
shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L1-02 =
1.0 min., operation at 50 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 5.47 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting a Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to a value different from 0) and H2-01 is set to H2-03 (output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to 1F (motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be output at. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum
90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
5
Output Current Observation
The inverter can observe the output current and thereby detect if something is wrong in the sequence or with the motor connection. There are two observer functions, one for the start and one during run.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
S1-14
S1-15
SE2 detection time
SE3 detection time
Name
Factory
Setting
200 ms
200 ms
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A A A
SE2 fault (SE2, Current observation at start)
At the brake open delay time (S1-06) + S1-14 after the Up/Down command was given, the output current is measured. If it is below 25% of the motor no-load current (E2-03) a SE2 fault will be output.
SE3 fault (SE3, Current observation during Run)
From the time S1-15 after the Up/Down command was given, the inverter starts to observe the output current continuously. If it falls below 25% of the motor no-load current (E2-03) a SE3 will be output.
5-
39
5
-40
Inverter Protection
Inverter Overheat Protection
The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature.
When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off.
To prevent a suddenly and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an over temperature, an overheating prealarm can be output. The temperature level for that pre-alarm can be set in parameter L8-02. Using parameter
L8-03 the inverter operation when an over temperature occurs can be selected.
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the heatsink temperature exceeds the overheat pre-alarm level set in L8-02.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
L8-02
L8-03
Overheat pre-alarm level
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm operation selection
* The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity.
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Function Set Value
20 Inverter overheat (OH)
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
95
°C *
3
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A A A
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Input Open Phase Protection
This function detects an open input phase by observing the DC bus ripple level.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-05
Name
Input open-phase protection selection
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1 No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
The factory setting is enabled. It is not recommended to disable this function.
Inverter Protection
Output Open Phase Protection
This function detects an open output phase by comparing the output current value of each phase with an internal set output open phase detection level (5% of inverter rated current). The detection will not work when the output frequency is below 2% of the base frequency.
Three settings are available:
•
L8-07=0, no output open phase detection
•
•
L8-07=1, the loss of one phase is detected only
L8-07=2, the loss of 2 or 3 phases is detected as well
The detection delay time can be set in parameter L8-20.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-07
L8-20
Name
Output open-phase protection selection
Output phase loss detection time
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
2
0.2 sec
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A A A
5
Ground Fault Protection
This function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents. Normally it should be 0. If the earth leakage current gets too high, the inverter output will be switched off and a GF fault is shown on the display. The fault contact is activated.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-09 Ground protection selection
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1 No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
Precautions
•
•
It is not recommended to disable this function.
A Ground Fault can also be detected if the contactors at the inverter output are opened when the output is still active. Therefore, to prevent false Ground Fault detection check the sequence and make sure, that the output is switched of or base blocked before opening the contactors.
5-
41
5-
42
Cooling Fan Control
This function controls the fan which is mounted to the inverters heatsink.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-10
L8-11
Name
Cooling fan control selection
Cooling fan control delay time
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
60 s
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A A A
Selecting the Cooling Fan Control
Using parameter L8-10 two modes can be selected:
0: The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON, i.e. a voltage is output. This is the factory setting. The turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in parameter L8-11. After a stop command the inverter waits for this time before switching OFF the cooling fan. The factory setting is 60 sec.
1: The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON.
Setting the Ambient Temperature
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A L8-12 Ambient Temperature 45° C No
At high ambient temperatures an output current derating has to be considered. The derating depends on the ambient temperature. The derating curve is shown in
. To ensure a safe inverter protection at high ambient temperatures, always set parameter L8-15 to the actual ambient temperature.
10 0
8 0
6 0
4 0
2 0
0
0 10 2 0 3 0 4 0
Tem perature (°C)
50 6 0
Fig 5.48 Ambient Temperature Derating Curve
Input Terminal Functions
Input Terminal Functions
The digital multifunction inputs can be set for several functions using the H1-01 to H1-05 parameters (terminal S3 to S7 function selection). These following section describes the input functions not mentioned in any other section.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
Name
Terminal S3 function selection
Terminal S4 function selection
Terminal S5 function selection
Terminal S6 function selection
Terminal S7 function selection
80
84
81
83
F
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Hardware Baseblock)
Using a baseblock command the inverter output can be cut immediately. When baseblock is activated the power supply of the IGBT driver circuit is cut off. In this case the motor will start coasting. If the baseblock command is cleared, the inverter output operation is resumed.
To use the baseblock function one of the digital input S8 must be used. The input is a NC input, i.e. if terminal
S8 is open, the inverter is baseblocked.
5
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function)
The external error function activates the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation. Using this function the inverter operation can be stopped on peripheral devices break down or other errors. The digital operator will display EFx (External error [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the number of the terminal at which the external error signal is input. For example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
•
Signal input level from peripheral devices
•
•
External error detection method
Operation after external error detection
5-
43
5-
44
The following table shows the relationship between the external fault conditions and the set value in H1-.
Set
Value
2C
2D
2E
2F
28
29
2A
2B
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NC Contact
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Error Detection Method
(See Note 2.)
Constant
Detection
Detection
During Operation
Yes
Decelerate to
Stop (Error)
Coast to Stop
(Error)
Yes
Operation During Error Detection
Emergency
Stop (Error)
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
1. Sets the input level at which errors are detected. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
Using the Timer Function
The multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7 can be used as timer function input terminals, and multifunction output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be used as timer function output terminals. By setting the delay time, you can prevent chattering of the sensors and switches.
•
•
Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7) to 18 (timer function input).
Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to
12 (timer function output).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name b4-01 b4-02
Timer function ON-delay time
Timer function OFF-delay time
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 s
0.0 s
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
Input Terminal Functions
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Function
18 Timer function input
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
12
Function
Timer function output
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
5
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 5.49 Timer Function Operation Example
5-
45
5-
46
Output Contactor Answer Back Detection
The output contactors can be observed using the output contactor answer back function. Therefore an auxiliary contact of the motor contactors must be connected to a digital input which is set to for this function
(H1-=86). If no answer back signal comes from the contactor, the inverter detects a SE1 fault (see below).
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Function
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop ´
Vector
Yes 86 Output contactor answer back
SE1 fault (SE1:Contactor Feed-back Faults)
There are 3 possibilities of fault condition
Case 1: Output contactor of output inverter kept closing before contactor closed command set.
Case 2: Output contactor cannot be closed within the contactor close delay time.
Case 3: Output contactor is opened during inverter running.
Contactor Faults
Run Delay
Speed
Up/Down
Speed selection
Inverter enable(D/I)
Contactor Control(D/O)
DC Injection/ zero servo
Contactor comformation
Contactor comformation
Contactor comformation
Case 1
Case 2
Case 3
Output Terminal Functions
Output Terminal Functions
The digital multifunction outputs can be set for several functions using the H2-01 to H2-03 parameters (terminal M1 to M6 function selection). These functions are described in the following section.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
Name
Terminal M1-M2 function selection
Terminal M3-M4 function selection
Terminal M5-M6 function selection
Factory
Setting
0
1
2
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
During Run (Setting: 0) and During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
During Run (Setting: 0)
OFF
ON
The Run command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
The Run command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
OFF
ON
The inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking or stopped)
The inverter is outputting a frequency.
These outputs can be used to indicate the inverter’s operating status.
Run command
Baseblock command
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output
During run 2 output
OFF ON
OFF
ON
Fig 5.50 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
Zero Speed (Setting: 1)
Output frequency
Zero speed level (b2-01)
5
Zero-speed output
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Fig 5.51 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (b2-01).
The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (b2-01).
5-
47
5-
48
Inverter Operation Ready (Setting: 6)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output will be switched ON when the initialisation of the inverter at startup has finished without any faults.
During DC Bus Undervoltage (Setting: 7)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus under voltage is detected.
During Baseblock (Setting: 8)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as the inverter output is base blocked.
Frequency Reference Source Selection (Setting: 9)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is ON when the digital operator is selected as frequency reference source. If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF.
Run Command Selection Status (Setting: A)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the digital operator is selected as RUN command source. If any other RUN command source is selected output is switched OFF.
Fault Output (Setting: E)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when any fault different from CPF00 and CPF01 occurs. The output is also not switched at minor faults. (Refer to
fault list.)
Minor Fault Output (Setting: 10)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when a minor fault occurs
(refer to
Fault Reset Command Active (Setting: 11)
If a multifunction output is set for this function the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is input at one of the digital inputs.
During Reverse Run (Setting: 1A)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON whenever a RUN command in reverse direction is active. The contact will also be ON during DC injection, Braking and Base Block.
It will not work when a forward RUN command is input.
During Base Block 2 (Setting: 1B)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched OFF as long as a Baseblock command is input at terminal S8
Output Terminal Functions
During Regenerative Operation (Setting: 1D)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the motor works regenerative, i.e. when energy is fed back to the inverter.
Speed Detection at deceleration (Door Zone) (Setting:42)
This output can be used to detect, that the car is in the door zone. The detection is speed dependent.
OFF
ON
V/f control and Open Loop Vector control
The output frequency is lower than S1-27 during deceleration
The output frequency is higher than S1-27 during deceleration
Closed Loop Vector control
The motor speed is lower than S1-27 during deceleration
The motor speed is higher than S1-27 during deceleration
If the Up/Down command is released, this output is switched OFF.
Not Zero Speed (Setting:43)
This function can be used for indicating the reverse condition of Zero speed status.
OFF
ON
The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (b2-01).
The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (b2-01).
5
5-
49
5
-50
Motor and V/f Pattern Setup
Setting Motor Parameters
In vector control method, the motor parameters are set automatically during autotuning (refer to
. If autotuning does not complete normally, set them manually.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
E2-10
E2-11
E2-12
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Name
Number of motor poles (Number of poles)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Motor rated output power
Motor iron saturation coefficient 3
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
14.00 A *
2.73 Hz *
4.50 A *
4 poles
0.771
Ω *
19.6%
0.50
0.75
112 W *
3.700 *
1.30
Note All factory-set parameters are for a Yaskawa standard 4-pole motor.
* The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 400 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW).
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
Q
No
No
A
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
No
Q
A
A
No
Q
A
Manual Setting of the Motor Parameters
Motor Rated Current Setting (E2-01)
Set E2-01 to the rated current value on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting (E2-02)
Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Rated speed (rpm) x No. of motor poles
Motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) –
120
Motor No-Load Current Setting (E2-03)
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally, the motor no-load current is not written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting (E2-04)
E2-04 is displayed only when Closed Loop Vector control method is selected. Set the number of motor poles as written on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting (E2-05)
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from
Motor and V/f Pattern Setup the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting accordingly.
•
•
•
E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (
Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (
Ω) at 75°C of test repor]t × 0.92 (Ω)
F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (
Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
Motor Leak Inductance Setting (E2-06)
Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance in E2-06 as percentage of the motor rated voltage. Make this setting when using high-speed motors because the standard value will be too high. (Normally, high speed motors have a low inductance compared to standard motors.) If the inductance is not written on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings (E2-07)
E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically during rotating autotuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting (E2-08)
E2-10 is displayed only in V/f control method and can be set to increase the torque compensation accuracy.
The motor iron loss has to be set in kW.
Autotuning
Autotuning sets motor parameters automatically. Therefore some motor data which are usually written at the nameplate must be input and the autotuning has to be performed.
1. If the output contactors is controlled by the inverter it will be closed during autotuning. If the contactors are controlled by an external controller make sure to close the contacts during autotuning.
2. Make sure to close the baseblock contact during autotuning. Otherwise the autotuning can not be started and will terminate with a minor fault.
3. For rotating autotuning make sure to open the brake.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
One of the following three autotuning modes can be set.
•
Rotating autotuning
•
•
Non-rotating autotuning
Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Rotating Autotuning (T1-01 = 0)
Rotating autotuning can be used for Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control only. Set T1-01 to 0, input the data from the motor nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will operate the motor for approximately 1 minute and set the required motor parameters automatically.
Use this tuning mode only, if the motor can rotate freely which means that the ropes are removed.
The gearbox can be connected to the motor.
5
5-
51
5-
52
Non-rotating Autotuning (T1-01 = 1)
Non-rotating autotuning can be used for Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control only. Set T1-01 to 1, input the data from the motor nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The inverter will supply power to the non-rotating motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor parameters will be set automatically. The remaining motor parameters will be set automatically during the first time operation.
Non-rotating Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be used in any control mode. This is the only possible autotuning for V/f control.
To perform autotuning in V/f control, set T1-02 (Motor rated power) and T1-04 (Motor rated current) and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the non-rotating motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor line-to-line resistance and cable resistance will be automatically measured.
Precautions Before Using Autotuning
Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
•
•
Use non-rotating autotuning whenever the load cannot be disconnected from the motor (e.g. the ropes can’t be removed).
Use rotating autotuning whenever performing autotuning when high precision is required or for a motor that is not connected to a load.
•
•
•
•
•
If the wiring between the Inverter and motor changes by 50 m or more perform non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance.
If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance.
If a mechanical brake is used, make sure that it is not opened for non-rotating autotuning. Make sure that it is opened for rotating autotuning.
Power will be supplied to the motor when non-rotating autotuning is performed even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed
.
To cancel autotuning, press the STOP key on the Digital Operator.
Precautions for Rotating and Non-rotating Autotuning
If the motor rated voltage is higher than the power supply voltage, lower the base voltage value like shown in
to prevent saturation of the Inverter’s output voltage. Use the following procedure to perform auto-
tuning:
1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).
2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):
T1-05 = Base frequency from motor nameplate
×
Motor rated voltage
3. Perform autotuning.
Motor and V/f Pattern Setup
After the completion of autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s nameplate.
Output voltage
Rated voltage from motor name plate
T1-03
0
Base frequency from motor name plate x T1-03
Rated voltage from motor name plate
Output frequency
Base frequency from motor name plate
Fig 5.52 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting
When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage
× 0.9. In this case at high speeds the output current will increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.
Precautions after Rotating and Non-rotating Autotuning
If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency
(E1-04) after autotuning.
5
5-
53
5-
54
Parameter Settings for Autotuning
The following parameters must be set for autotuning.
Parameter
Number
T1-01
T1-02
T1-03
T1-04
Name
Autotuning mode selection
Display
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotating autotuning
1: Non-rotating autotuning
2: Non-rotating autotuning for lineto-line resistance only
Motor rated power
Set the output power of the motor in
Kilowatts.
Motor rated voltage
Set the rated voltage of the motor.
*2
Motor rated current
Set the rated current of the motor in
Amps.
Setting Range
0 to 2
Factory Setting
Data Displays during
Autotuning
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
2 (V/f and V/f with
PG)
1 (Open and
Closed Loop Vector)
*1
Yes
(only
2)
Yes Yes
10% to 200% of
Inverter rated output
0 to 255.0 V
(200 V class)
0 to 510.0 V
(400 V class)
10% to 200% of
Inverter rated current
Same as Inverter rated output
200.0 V
(200 V class)
400.0 V
(400 V class)
Same as generalpurpose motor with same capacity as Inverter
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T1-05
T1-06
T1-07
T1-08
Motor rated frequency
Number of motor poles
Motor rated speed
Number of
PG pulses per revolution
Set the base frequency of the motor.
*2
Set the number of motor poles.
Set the base speed of the motor in r/min.
Sets the number of pulses for the PG
(pulse generator or encoder) per motor revolution without a multiplication factor
0 to 120.0 Hz
2 to 48 poles
0 to 24000
0 to 60000
50.0 Hz
4 poles
1450 r/min
1024
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T1-09
No load current
Sets the no load current of motor.
0.0 to
13.99
*2
E2-03 No Yes Yes
* 1. Only setting 2 (non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only) is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
* 2. For an inverter motor or vector control motor, the voltage and frequency may be lower than for a general-purpose motor. Always confirm setting on the nameplate or in test reports. Also, if you know the no-load values, set the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load frequency in T1-05 to obtain better accuracy.
Motor and V/f Pattern Setup
Setting the V/f Pattern
Using the E1- parameters the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as needed. It is not recommended to change the settings when the motor is used in Open Loop or Closed Loop vector control mode.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
E1-01
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-13
Input voltage setting
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
Max. voltage (VMAX)
Base frequency (FA)
Mid. output frequency (FB)
Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
Base voltage (VBASE)
Name
Factory
Setting
200 V
*1
50.0 Hz
190.0 V
*1
50.0 Hz
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
3.0 Hz
*2
20.0 V
*1*2
0.5 Hz
*2
12.5 V
*1*2
0.0 V
*4
No
No
No
No
No
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
Q Q Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
No
A
Q
No
No
No
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
* 3. The contents of parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
Setting Inverter Input Voltage (E1-01)
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 so that it matches the power supply voltage.
5
5-
55
5-
56
Setting the V/f Pattern
If E1-03 is set to F the V/f pattern can be set individually
using the parameters E1-04 to E1-10. See
for details.
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 5.53 V/f pattern setting
INFO
To set the V/f characteristics linear, set E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points:
•
•
When changing control method, parameters E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that control method.
Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX)
≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions
Setting Digital Operator/Monitor Functions
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 o2-09 o2-10 o2-12 o2-13 o1-01 o1-02 o1-03 o1-04 o1-05 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04
Name
Monitor selection
Monitor selection after power up
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Setting unit for frequency reference related parameters
LCD Display contrast
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
Inverter kVA selection
User parameter initial value
Frequency reference setting method selection
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
Cumulative operation time setting
Cumulative operation time selection
Initialize Mode
Fan operation time setting
Fault trace initialize
“Number of Travels” monitor initialize
Factory
Setting
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Change during
Operation
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
6
1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Monitor Selection (o1-01)
Using parameter o1-01 the third monitor item that is displayed in drive mode can be selected. This function has no effect on the optional LCD-operator (JVOP-160).
Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON (o1-02)
Using parameter o1-02 the monitor item (U1-) that is to be displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor when the power supply is turned ON can be selected.
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units (o1-03)
Set the Digital Operator/Monitor frequency reference and display units using parameter o1-03. The setting in o1-03 will affect the display units of the following monitor items:
•
•
U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
U1-02 (Output Frequency)
•
•
•
U1-05 (Motor Speed)
U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start) d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
Changing the Units for Frequency Parameters Related to V/f settings (o1-04)
Using parameter o1-04 the unit for frequency parameters related to the V/f setting can be changed. If o1-04 is set to 0 it will be Hz. If o1-04 is set to 1 it will be rpm.
5
5-
57
5-
58
Changing the Display Contrast (o1-05)
Using o1-05 the contrast of the LCD display on the digital operator can be raised or lowered. Lowering the o1-
05 value will decrease the contrast and vice versa.
Enabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (o2-01)
Set o2-01 to 1 to enable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator.
If the key is enabled, frequency reference source or the RUN command source can be switched over between
LOCAL (Operator) and REMOTE (b1-01/02 setting).
Disabling the STOP Key (o2-02)
This parameter is used to set whether the STOP key on the operator is active during remote control (b1-02
≠ 0) or not.
If o2-02 is set to 1, a STOP command from the operators STOP key will be accepted. If o2-02 is set to 0 it will be disregarded.
Saving User Parameters (o2-03)
You can save the current Inverter parameter setting values as user-set parameter initial values. Therefore parameter o2-03 has to be set to 1.
To initialize the inverter parameters using the user-set initial values in memory set parameter A1-03 to 1110.
To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Changing the Inverter Capacity Setting (o2-04)
The inverter capacity setting can be set using parameter o2-04. Refer to
page 4-53, Factory Settings that
Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
to see parameters that depend on this setting.
Normally it not necessary to change this setting, unless the control card has been changed.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key (o2-05)
This function is active when frequency references are input from the Digital Operator/Monitor. When o2-05 is set to 1, you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN keys without using the Enter key.
Operation Selection when the Digital Operator/Monitor is Disconnected (o2-06)
This function selects the operation when the digital operator gets disconnected when a RUN command is active.
If o2-06 is set to 0 the operation is continued.
If o2-06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop. The fault contact is operated. When the operator is reconnected an OPR (Operator disconnected) is shown.
Cumulative Operation Time (o2-07 and o2-08)
The inverter has a function that counts the operation time of the inverter cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-07 the cumulative operation time can be changed, e.g. after a replacement of the control board. If parameter o2-08 is set to 0 the inverter counts the time whenever the power supply is switched ON. If o2-08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only. The factory setting is 0.
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions
Cooling Fan Operation Time (o2-10)
This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-10 the counter can be reset, e.g. when the fan was replaced.
Fault Trace Initialize (o2-12)
This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting parameter o2-12 to 1.
“Number of Travels” counter Initialize (o2-15)
Using this parameter the lift operation counter monitor (U1-55) can be initialized.
Copying Parameters (JVOP-160 only)
The Digital Operator/Monitor can perform the following three functions using a built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).
•
Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator/Monitor by setting o3-01 to 1 (READ)
•
•
Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor to the Inverter by setting o3-01 to 2
(COPY)
Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor with Inverter parameters settings by setting o3-01 to 3 (VERIFY)
The data saved in the operator can be protected from overwriting by setting parameter o3-02 to 0. In the case a
READ command can not be executed. If it is nevertheless still done, “PrE” will be displayed at the operator.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
o3-01 o3-02
Copy function selection
Read permitted selection
Name
Factory
Setting
0
0
Change during
Operation
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A A A
5
5-
59
5-
60
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator/Monitor (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator/Monitor use the following method.
Table 5.1 READ Function Procedure
Step
No.
Explanation
Digital Operator/Monitor Display
1 Press the Menu Key and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
3
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function
Selection).
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.
5 Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key.
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function will start.
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 1
*0*
INV OP READ
-ADV-
READ
INV OP READING
7 If the READ function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.
-ADV-
READ
READ COMPLETE
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0
COPY SELECT
*0*
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to
page 6-14, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
for corrective actions.
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions
Writing Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor to the Inverter
(COPY)
To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator/Monitor to the Inverter, use the following method.
Table 5.2 COPY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Explanation
Digital Operator/Monitor Display
1 Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
3
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function
Selection).
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.
5 Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key.
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function will start.
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00 = 1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01 = 0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0
*0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 2
*0*
OP INV WRITE
-ADV-
COPY
OP INV COPYING
7 If the COPY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.
-ADV-
COPY
COPY COMPLETE
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0
COPY SELECT
*0*
If an error is displayed, set the parameters again. Refer to
page 6-14, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
for corrective actions.
5
5-
61
5-
62
Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator/Monitor Parameter Set Values
(VERIFY)
To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator/Monitor parameter set values, use the following method.
Table 5.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Explanation
Digital Operator/Monitor Display
1 Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
3
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until the parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function Selection).
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the function setting display.
5 Change the set value to 3 using the Increment Key.
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00 = 1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0
*0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 3
*0*
OP INV VERIFY
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function will start.
-ADV-
VERIFY
DATA VERIFYING
7 If the VERIFY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.
-ADV-
VERIFY
VERIFY COMPLETE
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3 01 = 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to
page 6-14, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
for corrective actions.
Application Precautions
INFO
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter data and the Digital
• Operator/Monitor data.
• Inverter product and type
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage class
• Control method
Digital Operator/Monitor Functions
Prohibiting Overwriting of Parameters
If A1-01 is set to 0, all parameters except A1-01 and A1-04 are write protected, U1-, U2- and U3-
will be displayed. If A1-01 is set to 1, only the parameters A1-01, A1-04 and A2- can be read or written, U1-, U2- and U3- will be displayed. All other parameters will not be displayed.
If you set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 1B
(write parameters permitted), parameters can be written from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing parameters other than the frequency reference is prohibited. However, the parameters can be read.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
A1-01 Parameter access level
Name
Factory
Setting
2
Change during
Operation
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05 and if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, only the settings of parameters A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32 can be modified.
The setting of all parameters except A1-00 can be prohibited using the password function in combination with setting parameter A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
A1-01
A1-04
A1-05
Parameter access level
Password
Password setting
Name
Factory
Setting
2
0
0
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Setting a Password
The password can be set in parameter A1-05. Normally A1-05 is not displayed. To display and modify A1-05 the MENU and Reset key must be pressed together in the A1-04 display.
5
5-
63
5-
64
Displaying User-set Parameters Only
The A2 parameters (user-set parameters) and A1-01 (parameter access level) can be used to establish a parameter set that contains only the most important parameters.
Set the number of the parameter to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. Using the advanced programming mode you can read and modify A1-01 to A1-03 and the parameters set in A2-01 to
A2-32 only.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting parameters
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
PG Option Cards
PG Option Cards
To get a more precise speed control the inverter can be equipped with a PG option card to connect a pulse generator. Two different PG cards can be used, the PG-B2 and the PG-X2. Refer to
page 2-24, Option Card Models and Specifications
to see details.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
F1-05
F1-06
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-14
Name
PG constant
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
Operation selection at deviation (DEV)
PG rotation
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
Overspeed (OS) detection level
Overspeed detection delay time (OS)
Excessive speed deviation (DEV) detection level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time (DEV)
PG open-circuit detection delay time
1024
1
1
3
0
1
115%
1.0 s
10%
0.5 s
2.0 s
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No No Q
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
No
A
Q
A
A
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
Using PG Speed Control Card
There are two types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in Closed Loop Vector control:
•
PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.
•
PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers (RS-422).
For the mounting instructions, specifications and connection diagrams refer to
page 2-24, Installing and Wiring Option Cards
If Open Loop Vector control is used and a PG card is installed, the speed detected by the PG card is displayed in the monitor parameter U1-05. Therefore the PG constant has to be set in parameter F1-01. The direction of the speed detection can be changed by parameter F1-05.
To change the U1-05 value to the internally calculated value remove the PG card.
IMPORTANT
Setting Number of PG Pulses (F1-01)
Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses per revolution.
Suit the PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction (F1-05)
Parameter F1-05 suits the PG rotation direction to the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating forwards, set whether it is A-phase leads or B-phase leads.
5
5-
65
5-
66
Inverter
Forward command
Motor PG (encoder)
A-phase leads when set value = 0
A-phase
B-phase
Pulse output
B-phase leads when set value = 1
A-phase
B-phase
Example: Forward rotation of standard motor (PG)
Forward command
Motor output axis rotates counter-clockwise during Inverter forward command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
With the used PG the A-phase leads (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Generally, the A-phase leads when the rotation direction is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the shaft side
(FWD command is input).
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio (F1-06)
This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B2. Set the division ratio for the PG pulse monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the two lower place digits.
The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 =
n
m
The division ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32
≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the division ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are output at the pulse monitor.
Detecting PG Open Circuit (F1-02 and F1-14)
Parameter F1-02 selects the stopping method when a PG disconnection is detected.
PG open (PGO) is only detected when the inverter is running at least with a frequency reference higher than
1% of the maximum output frequency or above the minimum frequency (E1-09) and the PG feedback signal is missing for the time set in F1-14 or longer.
Detecting Motor Overspeed (F1-03, F1-08 and F1-09)
An overspeed (OS) is detected when the motor speed continues to exceed the set frequency value in F1-08 for a time longer than set in F1-09. After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.
PG Option Cards
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference (F1-04, F1-10 and F1-11)
Speed deviation is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the speed reference and the actual motor speed) is too large. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected only after a speed agreement (speed reference and actual motor speed are within the setting range of L4-02) and if a speed deviation higher than the set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.
5
5-
67
5
-68
Battery Operation
Using battery operation the car can be moved to the next floor if the power supply fails. The battery operation, must be enabled by a digital input (H1- = 85).
The battery voltage must be set in parameter L2-11.
Related Constants.
Parameter
No.
L2-11 Battery Voltage
Name
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Function mane Setting
85 Battery operation command
Factory setting
0V
Change during operation
No
V/f
A
Open
Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
V/f
A
Open
Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
Battery operation wiring
SoftCharge
Resistor
P
A
C R
S
T
U
V
W
B
E
Contorl Power
200VClass(DC250V 300V)
400VClass(DC500V 600V)
E
D
P
N
Sx
SC
Battery Operation setting 85
Battery Operation
Battery sequence
The following timing chart shows the sequence of battery operation.
Vpn
Motor speed
UV det level
Coasting
Brake
Fault
C,D input contactor OFF
Battery voltage battery voltage x base speed
300(600 *1 )x2
*1: 400VClass using 600V
Approx. 1min
The power source of these contactors must keep supplying even if power loss.
Battery operation
Battery operation command E
Main Circuit contactor
A,B
A’contactor
Inverter ready
* exteranal operation signal
Approx. 5sec ON
ON
0.2 0.3sec
Approx.
1sec
7
8
4
5
6
No.
1
2
3
Description
When the bus voltage is blow the under voltage level, the inverter detects the under voltage (UV) fault.
Turn off the RUN command.
C and D contactors must be turned off and turn on the motor mechanical brake.
Need the approximately 5sec to start battery operation.
The multi-function digital input which is assigned with the battery operation command (E) must be turned ON.
The A’ contactor must be turned ON after passing 0.2~0.3 sec when A and B main contactors are turned ON.
The RUN commands turns ON after inverter ready status set.
The battery operation time must be within 1min.
E, A, B and A’ contactors must be turned OFF after RUN command OFF.
(CAUTION)
1. Battery operation speed
The speed during the battery operation will be limited as the following formula.
Speed during battery operation= (battery voltage x base speed) / (300Vx2)
When the 400V Class will be 600Vx2
2.Continuous operation is prohibited.
The cooling fan of inverter is stopped due to the low bus voltage.
Therefore the continuous operation of inverter is prohibited.
5
5-
69
5-
70
Battery selection
Use the following battery
Main bus voltage
Control voltage
200V Class
48V
200V
400V Class
96V
400V
Note Main bus voltage during battery operation is decided based on the 10% of motor base speed.
Voltage drop must be less than 5% under the following load condition.
Current of control power: 50W/ control voltage
Current of main power: (motor rated power x speed during battery operation x 200%) /
(battery voltage x 60% (motor efficiency) x motor base speed)
Automatic Fault Restart
Automatic Fault Restart
The inverter can be set to restart automatically when a fault occurs. The maximum number of restarts can be selected as well as the operation mode of the fault relay.
Auto-resetable Fault codes are: UV1, GF, OC, OV, OL2, OL3, OL4, UL3, UL4, PF, LF
Related Constants.
Parameter
No.
L5-01
L5-02
Name
Number of restarts
Restart operation selection
Factory setting
2
1
Change during operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Open
Loop
Vector
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
Number of restarts
The number of restarts can be set in parameter L5-01. The fault restart interval time is 2.0 sec.
Fault
DC
Injection/ zero servo
DC
Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Up/Down
Speed command
Hardware BB
Brake opened (D/O)
Fault (D/O)
Auto-Reset
2 sec interval time
The auto-reset signal is accepted when the hardware base block signal is recieved .
Fault Relay Operation
Parameter L5-02 can be used to enable or disable the fault relay (terminal MA-MB-MC) during fault retry condition.
•
•
L2-02 = 1 enabled the fault relay.
L2-02 = 0 disables the fault relay.
5
5-
71
5-
72
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasures for Inverter and motor problems.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................6-2
Troubleshooting .........................................................6-15
6
6
-2
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the fault and alarm functions of the Inverter. These functions include fault detection, alarm detection, operator programming error detection and auto-tuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates and the Inverter output is switched OFF causing the motor to coast to stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator/Monitor.
The faults can be categorized in two groups:
•
•
Faults that can be rested using an input or the reset key at the Digital Operator without cycling the power
(resetable faults)
Faults that require to cycle the power (non-resetable faults)
When a fault has occurred refer to the following identify the fault and to correct the causes.
To reset a fault it is necessary to remove the fault and the RUN signal. Only then a Reset signal is accepted.
See the following tables for the faults and corrective actions.
Table 6.20 Resetable Faults
Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Remove the motor and run the
Inverter without the motor.
GF
Ground Fault
Ground Fault
The ground current at the Inverter output exceeded 50% of the Inverter rated output current and L8-09=1
(Enabled).
One Inverter output was shorted to ground and/or a DCCT is defective.
Check the motor for a phase to ground short.
Check the output current with a clampmeter to verify the DCCT reading.
OC
Over Current
PUF
DC Bus Fuse Open
Overcurrent
The Inverter’s output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level.
DC Bus Fuse
The fuse in the main circuit is open.
Warning:
Never run the Inverter after replacing the DC bus fuse without checking for shorted components.
Shorted Inverter output phase-tophase, shorted motor, locked rotor, load too heavy, accel/decel time too short, contactor on the Inverter output has opened or closed, a special motor or a motor with a rated current larger than the Inverter’s output current is used.
Remove the motor and run the
Inverter without the motor.
Check the motor for a phase-tophase short.
Verify the accel/decel times
(C1-).
Check the Inverter for a phase-tophase short at the output.
Shorted output transistor(s) or terminals.
Check the motor and the motor cables for short circuits or insulation failures (phase-to-phase).
Replace the inverter after correcting the fault.
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
Default detection levels are:
200 V class: 410 VDC
400 V class: 820 VDC
The deceleration time is set too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Increase the deceleration time
(C1-02/04/06/08) or connect a braking option.
Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the inverter’s specifications.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
UV1
DC Bus Undervolt
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
UV3
MC Answerback
PF
Input Phase Loss
LF
Output Phase Loss
Table 6.20 Resetable Faults
Meaning Probable Causes
The voltage fluctuations of the power supply are too high.
Corrective Actions
Check the input voltage.
A momentary power loss occurred.
DC Bus Undervoltage
The DC bus voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection Level
(L2-05). The default settings are:
200V class: 190 VDC
400 V class: 380 VDC
The terminal screws of the input power supply are loose.
An open-phase error occurred at the input terminals.
Check the wiring of the input terminals.
Check the input voltage and the wiring of the input terminals.
The acceleration time is set too short.
Extend the settings in
C1-01/03/05/07
Main Circuit MC
Operation Failure
The MC stopped responding during
Inverter operation.
An error occurred in the inrush current prevention circuit while the Inverter was running.
Replace the Inverter.
Control Power Supply
Undervoltage
Undervoltage of the control circuit while the Inverter was running.
External load was pulling down the
Inverter’s power supplies or there was an internal short in the power/gate drive board.
Remove all connection to the control terminals and cycle the power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Inrush Current Prevention Circuit
Fault
An overheating of the charging resistor for the DC bus capacitors occurred.
The MC of the charging circuit did not respond 10 sec. after the MC ON signal has been output.
(Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)
The contactor of the inrush current prevention circuit is defective.
Cycle the power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
An unusual big ripple on the DC bus voltage has been detected.
Only detected when L8-05=1
(enabled)
The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.
A momentary power loss occurred
Tighten the input terminal screws
The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too high.
The voltage balance between the input phases is bad.
Check the power supply voltage
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the
Inverter output.
The fault is detected when the output current falls below 5% of the inverter rated current and L8-07=1 (enabled)
There is a broken wire in the output cable.
There is a broken wire in the motorwinding.
The output terminals are loose.
The motor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the Inverter's maximum motor capacity.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Check the motor and Inverter capacity.
6
6-
3
6-
4
Display
OH
Heatsink Overtemp
OH1
Heatsink Max Temp
RR
DynBrk Transistr
OL1
Motor Overload
OL2
Inv Overload
OL3
Car Stuck
OL4
Car Stuck
Meaning
Table 6.20 Resetable Faults
Probable Causes
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8-02 and L8-03 = 0 to 2.
The ambient temperature is too high.
There is a heat source nearby.
The Inverter's cooling fan(s) stopped.
Corrective Actions
Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive.
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter’s heatsink exceeded 105 °C.
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Stopped
The Inverter's internal cooling fan has stopped
(18.5 kW and larger).
Replace the cooling fan(s).
The ambient temperature is too high.
There is a heat source nearby.
Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive.
The Inverter’s cooling fan(s) stopped.
The Inverter’s internal cooling fan has stopped
(18.5 kW and larger).
Replace the cooling fan(s).
Dynamic Braking Transistor
The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
Defective or failed dynamic braking resistor caused braking transistor damage.
Cycle power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Motor Overload
Detected when L1-01 = 1 to 3 and the
Inverter’s output current exceeded the motor overload curve.
The overload curve is adjustable using parameter E2-01 (Motor Rated Current), L1-01 (Motor Protection Selection) and L2-02 (Motor Protection
Time Constant)
The load is too large. The acceleration time, deceleration time or cycle time are too short.
The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect for the application.
The setting of Motor Rated Current
(E2-01) is incorrect.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel/decel times
(C1-).
Check the V/f characteristics (E1-
).
Check the setting of Motor Rated
Current Setting (E2-01).
The load is too large. The acceleration time or deceleration times are too short.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel/decel times
(C1-).
Inverter Overload
The Inverter output current exceeded the Inverter’s overload capability.
The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect for the application.
Check the V/f characteristics (E1-
).
The size of the Inverter is too small.
Check the setting of Motor Rated
Current Setting (E2-01).
Overtorque/Car Stuck Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector
Control) exceeded L6-02 for longer then the time set in
L6-03 and L6-01 = 3 or 4.
Overtorque/Car Stuck Detection 2
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector
Control) exceeded L6-05 for longer then the time set in
L6-06 and L6-04 = 3 or 4.
Motor was overloaded.
Motor was overloaded.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and
L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
UL3
Undertorq Det 1
UL4
Undertorq Det 2
OS
Overspeed Det
PGO
PG Open
DEV
Speed Deviation
SVE
Zero Servo Fault
CF
Out of Control
EF0
Opt External Flt
Table 6.20 Resetable Faults
Meaning
Undertorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-02 for longer then the time set in
L6-03 and L6-04 = 7 or 8.
Probable Causes
Motor was underloaded.
Corrective Actions
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Undertorque Detection 2
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-05 for longer then the time set in
L6-06 and L6-04 = 7 or 8.
Motor was underloaded.
Motor Overspeed
Detected when F1-03 = 0 to 2 and A1-
02 = 3.
The motor speed feedback
(U1-05) exceeded the setting in F1-08 for a longer time than the setting in
F1-09.
Overshooting/Undershooting are occurring.
The reference was too high.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 are not appropriate.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and
L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
PG Disconnection
Detected when F1-02 = 0 to 2 and A1-
02 = 3
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting in F1-14.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Power is not being supplied to the PG.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Wrong brake control sequence when a brake is used.
Check if the brake is opened when the RUN command is applied.
The load is too large. Reduce the load.
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detected when F1-04 = 0 to 2 and A1-
02 = 3
The speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for a time longer than the setting F1-11
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
The load is locked.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 are not appropriate.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and
F1-11.
Wrong brake control sequence when a brake is used.
Check if the brake is opened when the RUN command is applied.
Zero Servo Fault
The motor position moved during
Zero Servo Operation.
The torque limit is too small.
The load torque is too large.
-
Control Fault
A torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration stop in Open Loop Vector control.
Motor parameters were not set properly.
Increase the torque limit.
Decrease the load torque.
Check for signal noise.
Check the motor parameters.
External fault input from Communications Option Card
An external fault condition was present, input from a communication option card.
Check for an external fault condition.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signals
6
6-
5
6-
6
Display
EF3
Ext Fault S3
EF4
Ext Fault S4
EF5
Ext Fault S5
EF6
Ext Fault S6
EF 7
Ext Fault S7
CE
Memobus Com Err
BUS
Option Com Err
SE1
Sequence Error 1
SE2
Sequence Error 2
SE3
Sequence Error 3
Meaning
Table 6.20 Resetable Faults
Probable Causes
External fault at terminal S3
External fault at terminal S4
External fault at terminal S5
External fault at terminal S6
An “external fault” was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
Corrective Actions
Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition.
External fault at terminal S7
MEMOBUS Communication Error
Detected when control data was not received correctly for two seconds and
H5-04 = 0 to 2 and
H5-05=1.
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Option Communication Error
After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
Detected no output contactor answer back for S1-16 time setting.
The output contactor or auxiliary switch is malfunction.
Check the output contactor.
Detect the output current below 25% of no-load current at opening motor brake.
The output contactor is opened.
Detect the output current below 25% of no-load current during running.
The output contactor is opened.
Check the output contactor.
Check the output contactor.
Fig 6.21 Non-resetable Faults
CPF00
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
CPF01
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
CPF02
BB Circuit Err
CPF03
EEPROM Error
Digital Operator/Monitor Communication Fault 1
Communication with the digital operator could not be established within 5 seconds after the power was supplied to the Inverter.
Digital operator cable was not securely connected or digital operator is defective and/or control board is defective
Disconnect the Digital Operator/
Monitor and then connect it again.
Replace the Inverter.
Cycle the power to the Inverter.
CPU External RAM Fault The control board is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
Digital Operator/Monitor Communication Fault 2
After communications with the digital operator was established, the communication stopped for 2 seconds or more.
Digital operator cable was not securely connected or digital operator is defective
The control board is damaged.
Disconnect the Digital Operator/
Monitor and then connect it again.
Cycle the power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Baseblock circuit error
A baseblock circuit error occurred at power-up.
EEPROM error
Check sum is not valid
Gate array hardware failure at powerup.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the Inverter
Replace the Inverter.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
CPF04
Internal A/D Err
CPF05
External A/D Err
CPF06
Option Error
CPF07
RAM-Err
CPF08
WAT-Err
CPF09
CPU-Err
CPF10
ASIC-Err
CPF20
Option A/D Error
CPF21
Option CPU Down
CPF22
Option Type Err
CPF23
Option DPRAM Err
Fig 6.21 Non-resetable Faults
CPU Internal A/D Converter Fault
CPU External A/D Converter Fault
Option Card Connection Fault
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected properly.
Turn off the power and reinstall the Option Card again.
The Inverter or Option Card is damaged
Replace the Option Card or the
Inverter.
Cycle the power to the Inverter
ASIC Internal RAM fault
Watchdog Timer Fault
CPU-ASIC Mutual
Diagnosis Fault
The control circuit is damaged.
-
The control circuit is damaged.
-
The control circuit is damaged.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
Cycle the power to the Inverter
Replace the Inverter.
Cycle the power to the Inverter
Replace the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
ASIC version fault
Communication Option Card A/D Converter Error
Self-diagnosis Fault of
Option Board
Option board connection is not correct.
Option card A/D converter is faulty.
Turn off the power and re-install the option board again
Remove all inputs to the option board
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the Inverter
Replace the option board
Replace the inverter
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Noise or spike was on the communication line and/or defective option board.
Cycle the power to the Inverter
Replace the option board
Option Board Code Number Fault
Option Board
Interconnection Fault
Replace the Inverter
Remove any option boards
Perform an initialization to factory defaults
Unrecognizable option board is connected to the control board. Cycle the power to the Inverter
Replace the option board
Replace the Inverter
Turn off the power and reinstall the option board again
An option board was not correctly connected to the control board, or an option board that was not made for the
Inverter is attached to the control board.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults
Cycle the power to the Inverter
Replace the option board
Replace the Inverter
6
6-
7
6-
8
Alarm Detection
Alarms are Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The system will automatically return to its original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator/Monitor display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03) if programmed
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Display
EF
External Fault
(flashing)
Table 6.22 Alarm Detection
Meaning
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and the reverse run commands are input simultaneously for 500ms or more. This alarm stops the motor.
Probable causes Corrective Actions
The external forward and reverse command were input simultaneously.
Check external sequence logic, so only one input is received at a time.
UV
DC Bus Undervolt
(flashing)
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
(flashing)
OH
Heatsnk Overtmp
(flashing)
DC Bus Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred
• The DC bus voltage was below the
Undervoltage Detection Level Setting (L2-05).
• The MC of the inrush current prevention circuit opened.
• The control power supply voltage when below the CUV level.
UV Alarm is only detected when the drive is in a stopped condition
For the probable causes please have a look at UV1, UV2 and UV3 in table
7.1.
For the corrective actions please have a look at UV1, UV2 and
UV3 in table 7.1
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: 410 VDC
400 V class: 820 VDC
OV Alarm is only detected when the drive is in a stopped condition
The power supply voltage is too high.
Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the
Inverter’s specifications
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the temperature programmed in L8-02.
Enabled when L8-03 = 3
The ambient temperature is too high.
There is a heat source nearby.
The Inverter cooling fan(s) has stopped.
Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the Inverter
Replace the cooling fan(s).
OL3
Car Stuck
(flashing)
Overtorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) exceeded L6-02 for longer then the time set in
L6-03 and L6-01 = 1 or 2
Motor was overloaded
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
OL4
Car Stuck
(flashing)
Overtorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) exceeded L6-02 for longer then the time set in
L6-03 and L6-01 = 1 or 2
Motor was overloaded
Ensure the values in L6-05 and
L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
EF3
Ext Fault S3
(flashing)
EF4
Ext Fault S4
(flashing)
EF5
Ext Fault S5
(flashing)
EF6
Ext Fault S6
(flashing)
EF7
Ext Fault S7
(flashing)
Display
UL3
Undertorque Det 1
(flashing)
UL4
Undertorque Det 2
(flashing)
OS
Overspeed Det
(flashing)
PGO
PG Open
(flashing)
DEV
Speed Deviation
(flashing)
EF0
Opt External Flt
(flashing)
Meaning
Table 6.22 Alarm Detection
Probable causes
Undertorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-02 for longer then the time set in L6-03 and L6-01 =
5 or 6.
Motor was underloaded
Corrective Actions
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Undertorque Detection 2
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-05 for longer then the time set in L6-06 and L6-04 =
5 or 6.
Motor was underloaded
Ensure the values in L6-05 and
L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Overspeed Alarm
Detected when A1-02 = 1 or 3 and F1-
03 = 3.
The motor speed feedback
(U1-05) exceeded the value set in F1-
08 for a time longer than the setting in
F1-09.
Overshooting/undershooting are occurring.
The reference was too high.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 are not appropriate.
Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09
PG Disconnection
Detected when F1-02 = 3 and A1-02 =
1 or 3.
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting in F1-14
There is break in the PG wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring
Power is not being supplied to the PG. Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
The load is too large.
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detected when F1-04 = 3 and
A1-02 = 1 or 3.
The speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the setting in F1-11.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
The load is locked.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 are not appropriate.
Reduce the load.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and
F1-11.
Communication Option Card External
Fault
An external fault condition was present, input from a communication option card.
Check for an external fault condition.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signals
External fault at terminal S3
External fault at terminal S4
External fault at terminal S5
External fault at terminal S6
External fault at terminal S7
An external fault was input from a multi-function input terminal
(S3 to S7) that is programmed for external fault function that alarms only and continues to run the Inverter.
Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition
6
6-
9
6-
10
Display
CE
MEMOBUS Com Err
(flashing)
BUS
Option Com Err
(flashing)
Ext Run Active
Cannot Reset
CALL
ComCall
(flashing)
Table 6.22 Alarm Detection
Meaning Probable causes
MEMOBUS Communications Alarm
Detected when control data was not received correctly for two seconds and
H5-04 = 3 and
H5-05 = 1.
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Corrective Actions
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
Option Communications Alarm
After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
Detected when a RESET command is input while the RUN command is still active
The RUN command has not been removed and a RESET command is input by digital input or by the
RESET button on the digital operator.
Remove the RUN signal first and reset the error.
Communications on Standby
Communication has not yet been established.
Connection was not made properly or user software was not configured to the proper baud rate or configuration
(e.g. Parity).
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Operator Programming Errors
An Operator Programming Error (OPE) occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is inappropriate. The Inverter will not operate until the parameter is set correctly; however, no alarm or fault outputs will occur. If an OPE occurs, change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in
. When OPE error is displayed, press the ENTER key to display U1-34 (OPE Detected).
This monitor will display the parameter that is causing the OPE error.
Display
OPE01 kVA Selection
OPE02
Limit
OPE03
Terminal
Table 6.23 Operator Programming Errors
Meaning
Inverter kVA Setting Error
Parameter Setting
Out of Range
Multi-function Input
Selection Error
Probable Causes
The control board was replaced and the kVA parameter (o2-04) is set incorrectly
Corrective Actions
Enter the correct kVA setting (o2-
04) by referring to the table “Factory settings that change with the
Inverter kVA setting” on page 5-
60.
Parameter setting was outside of the allowable range.
Verify the parameter settings.
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-
01 to H1-05) settings:
• Duplicate functions were selected.
• External Baseblock NO (8) and
External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the same time.
• The Emergency Stop Command
NO (15) and NC(17) are set simultaneously.
Verify the parameter settings in
H1-
OPE05
Sequence Select
OPE06
PG Opt Missing
OPE08
Constant Selection
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Setting
RUN/Reference Command
Selection Error
The Reference Source Selection b1-01 and/or the RUN Source Selection parameter b1-02 are set to 3 (option board) but no option board is installed.
Option board is not installed or is installed incorrectly
Control method selection error
Verify that the board is installed.
Remove the power supply and reinstall the option board again
Recheck the setting of b1-01 and b1-02.
One of the control methods needing a
PG feedback was selected (A1-02 =3), but a PG option board is not installed.
Verify the control method selection in parameter A1-02 and/or the installation of the PG option board.
Function Selection Error
V/f Parameter Setting Error
A setting has been made that is applicable with the current control method.
Example: A function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V/f control.
Verify the control method and the function.
V/f parameter settings were out of range.
Check parameters (E1-). A frequency/voltage value may be set higher than the maximum frequency/voltage.
Cycle power to the Inverter.
ERR
EEPROM R/W Err
EEPROM write error
The NV-RAM data does not match the
EEPROM data.
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
Do a factory initialization (A1-03)
6
6-
11
6-
12
Auto-tuning Fault
Auto-tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts to stop. No fault or alarm outputs will be operated.
Display
Er - 01
Fault
Meaning
Table 6.24 Auto-tuning Fault
Probable causes
There is an error in the data input for autotuning.
Corrective Actions
Check the input data.
Motor data fault
There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current.
Check the Inverter and motor capacity.
There is an error between the no-load current setting and the input motor rated current (when auto-tuning for line-to-line resistance is performed for vector control)
Check the motor rated current and no-load current.
Check the input data.
Er - 02
Minor Fault
Alarm
Er - 03
STOP key
STOP key input
An alarm is detected during auto-tuning.
Check wiring and the machine.
Check the load.
The STOP key was pressed to cancel autotuning.
-
Er - 04
Resistance
Line-to-Line Resistance Fault
Er - 05
No-Load Current
Er - 08
Rated slip
No-Load Current Fault
Rated Slip Fault
Autotuning was not completed in the specified time.
The auto-tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
• If the setting of T1-03 is higher than the Inverter input power supply voltage (E1-01), change the input data.
Er - 09
Accelerate
Er - 11
Motor Speed
Er - 12
I-det. Circuit
Acceleration Fault
Detected only for rotating auto-tuning
Motor speed Fault
Detected only for rotating autotuning
The motor did not accelerate in the specified time
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration
Time 1).
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02
(Torque Limits) if they are low.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
The torque reference exceed 100% during acceleration.
Detected when A1-02 = 2 or 3 (Vector control).
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration
Time 1).
• Check the input data (particularly the number of PG pulses and the number of motor poles).
Current Detection Fault
The current exceeded the motor rated current.
Check wiring of the Inverter and the mounting.
Any of U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 has open-phase
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Er - 13
Leakage Inductance Fault
End - 1
V/f Over Setting
End - 2
Saturation
End - 3
Rated FLA Alm
Meaning
Leakage Inductance Fault
Table 6.24 Auto-tuning Fault
Probable causes Corrective Actions
Auto-tuning was not completed in the specified time.
Check motor wiring.
Auto-tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.
V/f Settings Alarm
Displayed after auto-tuning is complete
The torque reference exceeded 100% and the no-load current exceeded 70% during auto-tuning.
Check and correct the motor settings
If the motor and the machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.
Motor Core Saturation Fault
Displayed after auto-tuning is complete.
Detected only for rotating autotuning
Rated Current Setting Alarm
Displayed after auto-tuning is complete
During auto-tuning, the measured values of motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1 and 2 (E2-07 and E2-08) exceeded its setting range. A temporary value was set: E2-07 = 0.75, E2-
08 = 0.50
Check the input data.
Check the motor wiring.
If the motor and the machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.
During auto-tuning, the measured value of motor rated current
(E2-01) was greater than the set value.
Check the motor rated current value.
6
6-
13
6-
14
Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
These faults can occur during the digital operator COPY function. When a fault occurs, the fault content is displayed on the operator. A fault does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output.
Function
READ
Function
COPY
Function
Verify
Function
Table 6.25 Digital Operator/Monitor Copy Function Faults
Digital Operator/Monitor
Display
Probable Causes
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
Corrective Actions o3-01 was set to 1 to write parameter into the Digital Operator/Monitor when the Operator was write-protected (o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to enable writing parameters into the
Operator’s memory.
IFE
READ DATA ERROR
RDE
DATA ERROR
CPE
ID UNMATCHED
VAE
INV. KVA UNMATCH
CRE
CONTROL
UNMATCHED
CYE
COPY ERROR
CSE
SUM CHECK ERROR
VYE
VERIFY ERROR
The data file read from the Inverter was of the wrong size indicating corrupted data.
An attempted writing of the Inverter data to the
Digital Operator/Monitor’s EEPROM failed.
The Inverter type or software number was different from the stored data in the digital operator
Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).
Check the Digital Operator/Monitor’s cable.
Replace the Digital Operator/Monitor.
A low Inverter voltage has been detected.
Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).
Replace the Digital Operator/Monitor.
Use stored data of the same product (L7) and software number (U1-14) only.
The capacity of the Inverter and the capacity of the stored data in the Digital Operator/Monitor are different.
Use stored data for the same Inverter capacity only (o2-04).
The control method of the Inverter and the control method of the stored data in the Digital Operator/
Monitor are different.
Use stored data for the same control method (A1-02).
A parameter setting written to the Inverter was different from the setting stored in the Digital
Operator/Monitor.
Upon completion of the COPY function, the
Inverter’s data checksum was different than the digital operator’s data checksum.
The set value of the digital operator and the
Inverter do not match
Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
Retry the Verify function (o3-01 = 3)
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and perform the appropriate countermeasures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to
page 6-2, Protective and Diagnostic Functions
.
If A Parameter Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if a parameter cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible:
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn off the RUN command and then set the parameters
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) settings are different, the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Enter the correct password in A1-04.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Shift/RESET key and the MENU key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then set the password and input the set password in parameter A1-04.
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to
in this chapter and correct the settings.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator/Monitor communication error. The connection between the Digital Operator/Monitor and the Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator/Monitor and then re-install it.
6
6-
15
6-
16
If the Motor Does Not Operate Properly
The following causes are possible:
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The frequency reference is 0.00 Hz or a no speed is selected by the digital inputs. Check the input signals and the frequency reference settings.
Also make sure to set the Baseblock signal. The inverter does not accept any input if it is base blocked.
The load is too heavy
Check the motor current. If it is at the limit of the inverter rated current the load might be too high. Check the inverter size and the mechanical system. Check also if the brake is operating or not.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring may be incorrect. When the Inverter operates in the forward direction, the forward direction of the motor will depend on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the motor specification
The direction of the motor rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W. If using an encoder, the polarity will also have to be switched. If the Inverter is operated in V/f mode also parameter b1-
04 can be used to change the rotation direction.
If the Motor Stalls or Acceleration is Slow
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, the output torque will be limited according these settings. Therefore the motor may not develop enough torque to accelerate or the acceleration time might be very long.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be increased. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the motor speed and torque will be limited. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.
Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not work properly if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set the motor parameters through calculations.
Troubleshooting
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
The following causes are possible:
The deceleration time is too long
The following causes are possible:
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power may be insufficient.
Consider increasing the motor and Inverter capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit is reached (L7-01 to L7-04), the motor torque will be limited. This can cause the deceleration time to be extended. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
6
If the Motor Overheats
The following causes are possible:
The load is too large.
If the motor load is too large and the torque exceeds the motor’s rated torque, the motor may overheat. Reduce the loads by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration/deceleration times. Also consider increasing the motor size.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to be within its acceptable range.
Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control may not perform efficiently if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set the motor parameters through hand calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Mode Selection (A1-02) to
V/f Control (0 or 1).
6-
17
6-
18
If Peripheral Devices are Influenced by the Starting or Running Inverter
The following solutions are possible:
•
Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise.
•
•
•
•
•
Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's input power terminals.
Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's motor terminals.
Use shielded motor cables or a conduit. Metal shields electrical noise.
Check the grounding of the Inverter and motor.
Separate main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring.
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running
The Inverter’s output is pulse modulated, i.e. the output voltage consists of high frequency pulses (PWM).
This high frequency signal causes a certain amount of leakage current which may cause the earth leakage breaker to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequencies countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help to some extent to lower the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02). In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
Troubleshooting
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration:
Oscillation and hunting occur with V/f control
The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01
(Torque Compensation Gain) and C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time). Decrease C4-01 carefully in steps of 0.05 and/or increase C4-02.
Furthermore the Slip Compensation Delay Time (C3-02) can be decreased.
Oscillation and hunting occur with Open Loop Vector control.
The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01
(Torque Compensation Gain), C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time Parameter) and C3-02 (Slip Compensation Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain parameters and raise the delay time parameters.
If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper performance may not be achieved for Vector Control. Perform auto-tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations.
Oscillation and hunting occur with Closed Loop Vector control
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the speed control loop (Automatic Speed Regulator, ASR) by changing C5- gain parameters. If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the ASR Delay Time, and then readjust the ASR gains.
If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper performance may not be achieved for Closed Loop Vector Control. Perform auto-tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations.
6
6-
19
6-
20
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter
Maintenance and Inspection........................................7-2
7
7
-2
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
•
The motor should not vibrate or make unusual noises.
•
•
There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Inverter or motor.
The ambient temperature should be within the Inverter’s specifications.
•
•
The output current value shown in U1-03 should not be higher than the motor or the Inverter rated current for extended period of time.
The cooling fan in the Inverter should be operating normally.
Before attempting any maintenance checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected. With power removed from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The Charge LED in the
Inverter will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10VDC. To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale. Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Item
External terminals Mounting bolts
Connectors
Table 7.1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied
Inspection
Are all screws and bolts tight?
Are connectors tight?
Corrective Procedure
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Cooling fins
All PCBs
Input Diodes
Output Transistors Power
Modules
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the
PCBs?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the modules or components?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10
5
to 6 x 10
5
Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10
5
to 6 x 10
5
Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10
5
to 6 x 10
5
Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
DC bus capacitors
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Apply power to the Inverter and conduct the following inspection:
Item
Cooling Fan(s)
Table 7.2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied
Inspection
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration, or has the total operating time exceeded 20,000 hours.
Check U1-40 for the elapsed cooling operation time.
Corrective Procedure
Replace Cooling Fan
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, and to prevent down time due to an unexpected failure, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only. Periodic inspection standards vary depending on the Inverter’s installation environment conditions and usage. The Inverter’s suggested maintenance periods are noted below.
Table 7.3 Part Replacement Guidelines
Cooling fan(s)
DC bus capacitor
Part Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years (20,000 hours)
5 years
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part.
(Determine need by inspection.)
Soft charge contactor
DC bus fuse
Control power fuse
–
10 years
Determine need by inspection.
Replace with new part.
PCB capacitors 5 years
Replace with new board.
(Determine need by inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30
°C/86°F
Load factor: 80% maximum
Operating rate: 12 hours maximum per day
7
7-
3
7-
4
Cooling Fan Replacement
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
If the Inverter is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure, the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Inverter from the enclosure.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan.
2. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows “1“ and when pull the fan out in the direction of arrow „2“.
3. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector.
4. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in direction of arrows “3“ and remove the fan cover from the fan.
3
1
2
3
Power connector
Air flow direction
Fan cover
1
Fig 7.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction is correct (see figure above).
2. Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter heatsink.
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More
The heatsink cooling fan is attached to the top of the heatsink inside the Inverter. The cooling fan(s) can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly.
2. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator/Monitor, and front cover from the Inverter.
3. Remove the control PCB (if necessary) bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board positioned near the top of the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board positioned at the back of the Inverter.
5. Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Inverter.
6. Remove the cooling fan(s) from the fan assembly.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching the new cooling fan(s), reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the
Inverter.
7
Control card
Control card bracket
Air flow direction
Fan Assembly
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 7.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)
7-
5
7-
6
Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card
The Terminal Card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring.
Removing the Terminal Card
1. Remove the terminal cover, Digital Operator/Monitor and front cover.
2. Remove the wires connected to FE and/or NC on the terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card („1“) until they are free. It is not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are captive and self-rising.
4. Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow „2“.
Mounting the Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal card and the control PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion.
The connector pins may be damaged if the terminal card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct
Inverter operation.
IMPORTANT
1
2
Fig 7.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Always confirm that the input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting the terminal card.
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter.
Standard Inverter Specifications..................................8-2
8
8
-2
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Table 8.4 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number
CIMR-L7Z
Max. applicable motor output (kW)
*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current
(A)
Max. output voltage
(V)
Max. output frequency (Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current
(A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
23P7
3.7
7
17.5
21
25P5
5.5
10
25
25
27P5
7.5
14
33
40
2011
11
20
49
2018
18.5
33
80
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
+ 10%, - 15%
2022
22
40
96
2030
30
54
130
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
52
2015
15
27
64
Up to 120Hz available by programing.
68 96 115
156
2037
37
67
160
176
2045
45
76
183
220
2055
55
93
224
269
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
Measures for power supply
DC reactor
12-pulse rectifica-
Optional
Not possible
Built In
Possible
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
Standard Inverter Specifications
400 V Class
Table 8.5 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number
CIMR-L7Z
Max. applicable motor output (kW)
*1
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Rated output current
(A)
Max. output voltage
(V)
Max. output frequency (Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current
(A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Measures for power supply
DC reactor
12-phase rectifica-
43P7
3.7
7
8.5
10.2
44P0
4.0
9
11
13.2
45P5
5.5
12
14
17
47P5
7.5
15
18
4011
11
22
27
4015
15
28
34
4018
18.5
34
41
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
120 Hz max.
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
22
Optional
Not possible
32 41 49
+ 10%, - 15%
±5%
4022
22
40
48
58
4030
30
54
65
78
4037
37
67
80
96
Built In
Possible
4045
45
80
96
115
4055
55
106
128
154
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the
Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse-rectification.
8
8-
3
8-
4
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V class Inverters.
Table 8.6 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-L7Z
Specification
Control method
Sine wave PWM
Closed Loop Vector control, Open Loop Vector control, V/f control
Carrier Frequency
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
Frequency range
Frequency accuracy
(temperature characteristics)
8 kHz higher carrier frequency possible with current derating.
1:40 (V/f control)
1:100 (Open Loop Vector control)
1:1000 (Closed Loop Vector control)
± 3% (V/f control)
± 0.2% (Open Loop Vector control)
± 0.02% (Closed Loop Vector control)
(25
°C ± 10°C)
5 Hz (control without PG)
30 Hz (control with PG)
Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.) (Vector control)
± 5%
0.01 to 120 Hz
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10
°C to +40°C)
Analog references: ± 0.1% (25
°C ±10°C)
Frequency setting resolution
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (11 bits plus sign)
Output frequency resolution
Overload capacity and maximum current
Frequency setting signal
Acceleration/Deceleration time
0.01 Hz
150% of rated output current for 30 sec.
0 to +10V
0.01 to 600.00 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration time settings)
Main control functions
Overtorque/undertorque detection, torque limits, 8-speed control (maximum), 4 acceleration and deceleration times, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, auto-tuning (rotational or stationary), dwell function, cooling fan ON/
OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, auto-restart after fault, DC braking for starting and stopping, automatic fault reset and parameter copy function, special Lift functions and sequences, short floor, hardware baseblock
Standard Inverter Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-L7Z
Motor protection
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Fuse blown protection
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator
Protective structure
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Altitude
Vibration
Table 8.6 Common Specifications
Specification
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Stops at approximately 200% of rated output current.
Stops for fuse blown.
OL2 fault at 150% of rated output current for 30 sec
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently.
Protection by electronic circuits.
Glows when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 10 VDC or more.
Enclosed wall-mounted type (IP20): All models
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
-–10
°C to 45°C
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20
°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
1000 m max.
10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s
2
max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s
2
max
8
8-
5
8-
6
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Inverter Application Precautions ..................................9-2
Motor Application Precautions .....................................9-4
User Constants ............................................................9-5
9
9
-2
Inverter Application Precautions
Selection
Observe the following precautions when selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a compensating capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the converter section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor to improve the power supply power factor.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply
(kVA)
DC or AC reactor required
DC or AC reactor not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 9.4
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist, dust, and other contaminants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not exceed the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The maximum output frequency can be set up to 120Hz. Setting the output frequency too high can damage the machine. So pay attention to the mechanical system and observe required limits for the output frequency.
Inverter Application Precautions
DC Injection Braking
If the DC Injection Braking Current or the Braking Time are set too high the motor can overheat what can damage the motor
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD
2
/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and control sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
If a magnetic contactor is installed in the power supply line do not exceed one start per hour. Switching more often can damage the inrush current prevention circuit.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turning OFF the main circuit power supply it can take several minutes before the DC bus is discharged completely. The CHARGE LED, indicating if the DC bus is charged, glows above a voltage of 10VD.
9
9-
3
9
-4
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges
If a standard cooled motor is used at low speed the cooling effects are diminished. If the motor is used in constant torque applications in low speed area the motor may overheat. If full torque is required at low speed continuously an externally cooled motor must be used.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the inverter is used with an input voltage of 440 V or higher and long motor cables, voltage spikes at the motor terminals may occur which can damage the motor windings. Please ensure that the motor insulation class is sufficient.
Noise
The noise generated in the motor depends on the carrier frequency. The higher the setting the less the generated noise is.
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select an appropriate
Inverter according to the maximum current of the motor.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase capacitor motor. Any capacitors directly connected to the inverter output may damage the Inverter.
User Constants
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table. These are factory settings for a 200 V Class Inverter with
3.7 kW (open loop vector control).
Table 9.7 User Constants
No.
Name
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09
C1-10
C1-11
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05 b2-08 b4-01 b4-02 b6-01 b1-01 b1-02 b1-06 b1-08
A1-00 Language selection for Digital Operator display
A1-01 Parameter access level
A1-02 Control method selection
A1-03 Initialize
A1-04 Password
A1-05 Password setting
A2-01 to
A2-32
User specified parameters
Reference source selection
RUN command source selection
Control input scan
Run command selection in programming modes
Magnetic flux compensation volume
Timer function ON-delay time
Timer function OFF-delay time
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell time at start
Dwell frequency at stop
Dwell time at stop
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
Acceleration time 3
Deceleration time 3
Acceleration time 4
Deceleration time 4
Emergency stop time
Accel/decel time setting unit
Accel/decel time switching frequency
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
1.5 s
1
0.0 Hz
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
Setting
Factory
Setting
0
2
0
0
0
0
–
0%
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 Hz
1
1
0
1
0.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
10.0 s
9
9-
5
9-
6
No.
C2-04
C2-05
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
C3-05
C4-01
C4-02
C4-03
C4-04
C4-05
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09
C5-06
C5-07
C5-08
C5-09
C5-10
C6-02 d1-01 d1-02 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13
Table 9.7 User Constants
Name
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed
Slip compensation gain
Slip compensation delay time
Slip compensation limit
Slip compensation selection during regeneration
Output voltage limit operation selection
Torque compensation gain
Torque compensation delay time constant
Starting torque compensation (FWD)
Starting torque compensation (REV)
Starting torque compensation time constant
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
ASR integral (I) time 1
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR delay time
ASR switching frequency
ASR integral (I) limit
ASR proportional (P) gain 3
ASR integral (I) time 3
Carrier frequency selection
Frequency reference 1
Frequency reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Frequency reference 4
Frequency reference 5
Frequency reference 6
Frequency reference 7
Frequency reference 8
Frequency reference 9 Vn
Frequency reference 10 V
1
Frequency reference 11 V
2
Frequency reference 12 V
3
Frequency reference 13 V r
40
*1
0.5
*1
20
*1
0.5
*1
0.004 ms
0.0 Hz
400%
40.00
0.500 s
1
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Factory
Setting
0.5 s
0.50 s
1.0
*1
2000 ms
*1
200%
1
1
1.00
200 ms
*1
0.0%
0.0%
10 ms
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Setting
User Constants
No.
E2-11
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
F1-05
F1-06
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-14
F4-01
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
E2-09
E2-10
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-13
E2-01
E2-02 d6-06
E1-01
E1-04
E1-05 d1-14 d1-17 d1-18 d6-03
Table 9.7 User Constants
Name
Frequency reference 14 Inspection
Jog frequency reference / Leveling speed
Speed priority selection
Field forcing function selection
Field forcing function Limit
Input voltage setting
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
Max. output voltage (VMAX)
Base frequency (FA)
Mid. output frequency (FB)
Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
Base voltage (VBASE)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Number of motor poles
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Monitor mechanical losses
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Motor rated output power
PG constant
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
Operation selection at deviation
PG rotation
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
Overspeed detection level
Overspeed detection delay time
Excessive speed deviation detection level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
PG open-circuit detection delay time
Channel 1 monitor selection
0
1
1
3
*1
*1
1024
1
*1
*1
4 poles
*1
*1
0.50
0.75
0.0%
115%
0.0 s
10%
0.5 s
1.0 s
2
*1
50.0 Hz
*1
*1
*1
*1
0.0 V
*1
Factory
Setting
25 Hz
4.00 Hz
1
0
400%
*1
50.0 Hz
Setting
9
9-
7
9-
8
No.
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
H3-05
H3-06
H3-07
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
F6-04
F6-05
F6-06
H1-01
H1-02
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
F5-08
F5-09
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
F4-07
F4-08
F5-01
Table 9.7 User Constants
Name
Channel 1 gain
Channel 2 monitor selection
Channel 2 gain
Channel 1 output monitor bias
Channel 2 output monitor bias
Analog output signal level for channel 1
Analog output signal level for channel 2
Channel 1 output selection
Channel 2 output selection
Channel 3 output selection
Channel 4 output selection
Channel 5 output selection
Channel 6 output selection
Channel 7 output selection
Channel 8 output selection
DO-08 output mode selection
Operation selection after communications error
Input level of external error from Communications Option Card
Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card
Trace sampling from Communications Option Card
Current monitor unit selection
Torque reference/torque limit selection from communications option card
Terminal S3 function selection
Terminal S4 function selection
Terminal S5 function selection
Terminal S6 function selection
Terminal S7 function selection
Terminal M1-M2 function selection
Terminal M3-M4 function selection
Terminal M5-M6 function selection
Frequency reference AI-14B CH1signal level selection
Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input gain
Frequency referenceAI-14B CH1 input bias
AI-14B CH3 signal level selection
AI-14B CH3 function selection
AI-14B CH3 input gain
AI-14B CH3 input bias
6
0
40
41
83
F
84
81
0
80
0
0
0
1
0
1
100.0%
0.0%
0
2
100.0%
0.0%
6
37
0F
0F
2
4
0
1
Factory
Setting
100.0%
3
50.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0
0
Setting
User Constants
Table 9.7 User Constants
No.
Name
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
L7-01
L7-02
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
L4-05
L4-06
L5-01
L5-02
L7-03
L7-04
L7-06
L7-07
L1-01
L1-02
L2-05
L2-11
L3-01
L3-02
L3-05
L3-06
H3-08 AI-14B CH2 signal level selection
H3-09 AI-14B CH2 function selection
H3-10 AI-14B CH2 input gain
H3-11 AI-14B CH2 input bias
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant for the AI-14B
H3-15 Terminal A1 function selection
H3-16 Terminal A1 input gain
H3-17 Terminal A1 input bias
Motor protection selection
Motor protection time constant
Undervoltage detection level
Battery Voltage
Stall prevention selection during accel
Stall prevention level during accel
Stall prevention selection during running
Stall prevention level during running
Speed agreement detection level
Speed agreement detection width
Speed agreement detection level (+/-)
Speed agreement detection width (+/-)
Operation when frequency reference is missing
Frequency reference value at frequency reference loss
Number of auto restart attempts
Auto restart operation selection
Torque detection selection 1
Torque detection level 1
Torque detection time 1
Torque detection selection 2
Torque detection level 2
Torque detection time 2
Forward drive torque limit
Reverse drive torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Torque limit time constant
Torque Limit Operation during accel/decel
0
150%
0.1 s
300%
0
0
150%
0.1 s
300%
300%
300%
200 ms
0
150%
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
0
80%
2
0.0%
1
1.0 min
190 V
0V
1
150%
1
Factory
Setting
0
3
100.0%
0.0%
0.03 s
0
100.0%
Setting
9
9-
9
9-
10
No.
L8-02 o2-12 o2-15 o3-01 o3-02 o2-07 o2-08 o2-09 o2-10 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o1-03 o1-04 o1-05 o2-02
S1-02
S1-03
S1-04
L8-20
N2-01
N2-02
N5-01
N5-02
N5-03 o1-01 o1-02
L8-03
L8-05
L8-07
L8-09
L8-10
L8-11
L8-12
L8-18
Table 9.7 User Constants
Name
Overheat pre-alarm level
Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
Input open-phase protection selection
Output open-phase protection selection
Ground protection selection
Cooling fan control selection
Cooling fan control delay time
Ambient temperature
Soft CLA selection
LF detection time
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant
Feed forward control selection
Motor Accel Time
Feed forward proportional gain
Monitor selection
Monitor selection after power up
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/f characteristics
LCD Display contrast adjustment
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
User parameter initial value kVA selection
Frequency reference setting method selection
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
Cumulative operation time setting
Cumulative operation time selection
Initialize Mode
Fan operation time setting
Fault trace initialize
“No of Travels” monitor initialize
Copy function selection
Read permission selection
DC injection braking current at start
DC injection braking current at stop
DC injection braking time at start
0
0
2
0 hr
0
0
0 hr.
0
0
0
50%
50%
0.30 sec
0
0
3
0
0
0
6
1
45 °C
1
0.2sec
1.00
50 ms
1
0.178 s
1.00
Factory
Setting
75 °C
*1
3
0
2
1
0
60 s
Setting
User Constants
Table 9.7 User Constants
No.
Name
T1-03
T1-04
T1-05
T1-06
T1-07
T1-08
T1-09
S1-27
S2-01
S2-02
S2-03
S2-07
S3-01
T1-01
T1-02
S1-19
S1-20
S1-21
S1-22
S1-23
S1-24
S1-25
S1-26
S1-05
S1-06
S1-07
S1-14
S1-15
S1-16
S1-17
S1-18
DC injection braking time at stop
Brake release delay time
Brake close delay time
SE2 detection delay time
SE3 detection delay time
Run delay time
DC injection current gain at regenerative operation
DC injection current gain at motoring operation
Output contactor open delay time
Zero servo gain
Zero servo completion width
Starting torque compensation increase time
Torque compensation gain during lowering
Torque compensation bias during raising
Torque compensation bias during lowering
Dwell speed at start reference
Door zone speed level
Motor rated speed
Slip compensation gain in motoring mode
Slip compensation gain in regenerative mode
Slip compensation delay time
Short floor operation selection
Autotuning mode selection
Motor output power
Motor rated voltage
Motor rated current
Motor base frequency
Number of motor poles
Motor base speed
Number of PG pulses
Motor no-load current
* The factory setting depends on the inverter model and the control method.
*1
*1
*1
60.0 Hz
4 poles
1450 r/min
1024
E2-03 value
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
1380 rpm
0.7
1.0
200ms
0
0
20%
0.10sec
5
10
500ms
1.000
0.0%
0.0%
Factory
Setting
0.60
0.20
0.10
200ms
200ms
0.10sec
100%
Setting
9
9-
11
9-
12
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Precise speed control
Smooth acceleration & deceleration
Advanced protection functions
Closed loop vector control
Digital operator/monitor
Autotuning
Short floor operation
Slip compensation
Frequently asked questions
The Varispeed L7 is equipped with features such as precise speed control, smooth acceleration and deceleration, advanced protection functions, closed loop vector control, a digital operator/monitor, autotuning, short floor operation, and slip compensation.
The Varispeed L7 frequency inverter is designed specifically for lifts and is suitable for various applications, such as residential, commercial, and industrial elevators.
The Varispeed L7 frequency inverter is available in two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V.
Detailed instructions for installing and connecting the Varispeed L7 are provided in the accompanying User's Manual.
The Varispeed L7 inverter includes protective functions such as motor overload protection, overcurrent protection, overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection, overtemperature protection, and ground fault protection.